JP6412307B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention performs a variable display relates controllable gaming machine Advantageously advantageous state for the player.

  Conventionally, there has been a pachinko gaming machine that can change the hold display displayed on the effect display device by the action of the character displayed on the effect display device (for example, Patent Document 1). There are multiple types of characters (for example, butterflies and bees) that act.

JP 2013-353 A

  However, there is a possibility that the effect of the effect may be reduced when the ratio of changing the hold display varies depending on which of the plurality of types of characters acts.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a reduction in effect of production.

(1) A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A plurality of types of winning areas (a first starting winning opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14, and a large winning opening);
Signal output means for outputting a signal (winning information signal) that can specify the number of winnings of the game medium (winning information signal)
For example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the information output process of S29),
A holding storage means (for example, the first and second holding storage buffers in FIG. 7) capable of storing a plurality of information relating to variable display as holding information;
Hold display means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold storage display unit 18d) capable of holding display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage unit;
Decision means for deciding whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560, step S61, step S71 of FIG. 12);
Determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560, step S220 in FIG. 11) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before determination by the determination means;
Based on the determination of the determination means, specific mode display means (for example, for effect control) that can change the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the object of the determination to a specific mode (for example, blue or red) The on-hold storage is displayed in step S729 in FIG. 17, and the change effect or change gaze effect determined in step S518 and step S524 in FIG. 22 is the effect control pattern started in step S506 in FIG. It is executed in the production and the hold memory is changed or cannot be changed.)
As a specific effect (for example, a change effect by character A, B, a change gasset effect) regarding whether or not the hold display is the specific mode, a first specific effect (for example, a change effect by character A, a change gasset effect) and the relevant Specific effect means (for example, an effect control microcomputer) capable of executing a second specific effect (for example, a change effect or change effect by a character B) having a higher expectation that the hold display becomes the specific mode than the first specific effect. 100, the change effect and the change gaze effect determined in steps S518 and S524 in FIG. 22 are executed in the effect control pattern effect started in step S506 in FIG. 21, and the hold memory is changed or changed. Can not be made.)
When the first specific effect is executed a plurality of times for one hold display, the one hold display may not change to the specific mode,
When the second specific effect is executed but the on-hold display is not in the specific mode (for example, when the change gaze effect is executed on the character B), the first specific effect is executed, but the on-hold display is The ratio at which the first specific effect is executed for the hold display is lower than when the specific mode is not achieved,
When the number of the hold information is a predetermined number of 2 or more, when any of the hold display modes is changed, all the hold display modes are changed when the number of the hold information is the predetermined number. The ratio of the specific effect being executed is higher than when not.

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect with high expectation is executed, but the hold display is not in a specific mode, and the player is disappointed, but the same hold display is targeted. It is possible to prevent the player from being further discouraged by executing the first specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the second specific effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The specific effect means executes the specific effect during variable display prior to variable display based on hold information corresponding to the hold display related to the specific effect (for example, determined in steps S518 and S524 in FIG. 22). The change effect and the change effect are executed with the effect control pattern effect started in step S506 of Fig. 21. Thus, when the hold display is being made, the change effect or the change effect is made with respect to the hold display. Production is performed.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable display.

(3) In the game board of (1) or (2) above,
The particular embodiment display means, the hold display corresponding to the target and became pending information of the determination before SL-size constant means, certain embodiments (e.g., white) the first specific embodiment from (e.g., blue) is possible to change the as well as a possible, the variable display of the display results based on the suspension information than the first specific aspect of the first specific aspect is a high expectation that the particular display result (e.g., see FIG. 19) a second particular embodiment (For example, refer to FIG. 19 and FIG. 24).

  According to such a configuration, the expectation can be increased step by step. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The particular embodiment display means, in different proportions between when the determination result that the particular display result is not obtained and when obtained by the determination unit, to the specific embodiments of the hold display through the specific effect The process or the process of setting the hold display to the specific mode without passing through the specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20, it is changed at the time of winning a prize and changed in the middle when it is out of the big hit. The ratio of the case where it is not changed and the case where it is changed in the middle is different.)

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
When the startup area game media passes, with whether in the specific embodiment the hold display corresponding to the suspension information generated by the passage of the game medium, before the variable display based on the suspension information is started The holding effect determining means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, step S726 in FIG. 17, step S727) is further provided for determining at which timing the specific effect is to be executed and the type of the specific effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load other than when the starting area is passed.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the area | region which preserve | saves data, such as a random number corresponding to the pending | holding memory | storage in the game control microcomputer side. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning time determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the presentation side hold | maintenance memory buffer which is an area | region which preserve | saves the data corresponding to the hold memory by the microcomputer for production control. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change production determination table and a change effect production determination table. It is a display screen figure for demonstrating the effect display which changes a hold display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change gusset effect determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st display screen figure for demonstrating the production | presentation display which changes the hold display in a modification. It is a 2nd display screen figure for demonstrating the production | presentation display which changes the hold display in a modification. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process of the operating / non-operating information from a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the historical information (machine history information) from the shipment of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment to disposal. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until shipping information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of shipping information. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until installation information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the installation information input into a machine history management center in FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow until removal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow until discard information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the discard information input into a machine history management center. It is the schematic for demonstrating the history management of the front frame and game board which concern on this embodiment. It is the schematic of the table which memorize | stores the information of a frame, and the information of a game board, in order to perform machine history management of a front frame and a game board. 10 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of a front frame and a game board by a machine history management center. It is a figure explaining the table referred with the flowchart shown in FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part is unreached. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine. A starting area provided in the gaming area is a gaming medium. Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after passing, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are variably displayed, and it is advantageous for the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is controlled to a specific gaming state.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls) as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle ( (Operation knob) 5 and the like are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). A stick controller 122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like with respect to the trigger button 125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. Built-in). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 122 and the like. Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 having the trigger button 125 are provided as an example of the operation means that can be operated by the player is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be provided as the operation means. Further, as the operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display 8 a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and a plurality of types that can identify each of them. And a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as the identification information.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is configured by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and displays various images such as a variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the display screen. An area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b 2 When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  When the jackpot display result (bonus symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derived display is performed, the effect display device 9 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) It is stopped, swinging, enlarged, reduced, or deformed in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols may fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol may be switched. An effect that is performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are synchronously changing while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information for identifying each. The first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second display) that variably displays each second special symbol as identification information that can be identified. Fluctuation display portion) 8b is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  In the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition) which is the execution condition of the variation display is established (for example, the game ball is After passing through the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the first special symbol and This is started based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and the display result (when the variation display time (variation time) elapses) The stop symbol is derived and displayed. In the present embodiment, regarding the special symbol variable display, when both the first execution condition based on the first special symbol and the second execution condition based on the second special symbol are satisfied, the variable display of the second special symbol Is preferentially established over the start condition of the first special symbol variation display, and the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize. Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, The first start condition that enables the display of the variation of one special symbol is established), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 In step S, the variation display of the effect design is started. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2) The second start condition that allows the variable symbol display to start is established), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 In step S, the variation display of the effect design is started. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 recalls the jackpot as the jackpot display result. Such a combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a first hold memory display unit 18c for displaying the first hold memory number and a second hold memory display unit 18d for displaying the second hold memory number are formed at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened is called a round (hereinafter also simply referred to as R). Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured so as to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a game card as a game recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). .

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability / base after the big hit game is ended, the number of open times (number of rounds) in the big hit, and the open time of each round are shown. As shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, as the big hit types, a normal big hit, a probable big hit, and a sudden probable big hit (hereinafter also referred to as “surprising big hit”) are provided.

  By winning the jackpot (the jackpot determination based on winning the start is determined to be a jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The big hit gaming state is a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. In the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened, a predetermined opening state end condition (a predetermined round opening time has elapsed in the opening state or a predetermined number (for example, 10) ) Is closed in response to the establishment of an open end condition that a winning ball is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until a predetermined number of times of release (final round) in the jackpot gaming state is reached.

  In the present embodiment, the round opening time is 29 seconds, 29 seconds, and 0.5 seconds for each of the normal jackpot, the probability variation jackpot, and the sudden hit jackpot. In addition, the number of times of opening is normally 15 times, 15 times, and 2 times for each of the big hit, the probability variation big hit, and the sudden big hit.

  In this way, in the big hit, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short and it is virtually impossible to win the big prize opening, and the prize ball (the prize ball paid out for the prize) is substantially It is a big hit that cannot be obtained. In addition, the winning big hit may be a big hit from which a prize ball is obtained.

  After the big hit gaming state, the big hit probability is controlled to a low probability state with a normal probability or a high probability state in which the probability is improved (probability fluctuation state, also referred to as a probability change state for short). The high probability state is one of special game states that are advantageous for a player different from the specific game state.

  In the present embodiment, the probability change big hit and the sudden big hit are controlled to a high probability state, and the normal big hit is controlled to a low probability state. In the present embodiment, the high-probability state continues until the special symbol variation display is performed 100 times or until the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability state may be continued until the next big hit.

  Further, after the big hit gaming state, the base is controlled to a high base. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. The high base state is one of the special game states that is advantageous for the player, which is different from the specific game state. Note that the base may be controlled to the high base state or the low base state depending on the type of the big hit after the big hit gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the base after the big hit is a high base for any of the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit and the sudden big hit. In the present embodiment, the high base state continues until the special symbol change display is performed 100 times or until the next big hit occurs, whichever comes first. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high base state may be continued until the next big hit. In this case, the high base state is controlled on the premise that the high probability state is in effect.

  As a method of controlling to the high base state, for example, there is a method of controlling to the electric chew support control state in association with the short time state. The short-time state is a state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened compared to the non-short-time state. The electric chew support control state means that by increasing the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the frequency at which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, thereby making it easy to win the variable winning ball device 15 It is a state that becomes higher (higher approach, higher frequency). This control is called electric Chu support control because it is a control that facilitates winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, that is, the electric tulip.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 is open is higher than when the control is not performed. As a result, the game ball is likely to start and win (the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are more likely to satisfy the variable display execution condition). Further, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 14 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  In addition, as the electric chew support control, the high base state is realized by executing any one of the above-mentioned normal symbol shortening control, normal symbol probability changing control, opening time extension control, and opening frequency increase control. You may make it. In addition, as the electric chew support control, any combination of any two of the above-described normal symbol shortening control, normal symbol probability changing control, opening time extension control, and opening number increase control, or any three of them is possible. The high base state may be realized by any combination of the two controls.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  In this embodiment, terms indicating a combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state are “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, “high accuracy low base state”, and Use “highly accurate base state”. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state may be controlled to a short time state and a high base state. As described above, the transition time to the short-time state and the high base state reduces the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state occurs, an effective start winning is likely to occur and a big hit game is performed. Is likely to be increased. Since the start condition and the end condition of the control are the same in the short-time state and the high-base state, the state controlled to the short-time state and the high-base state may be representatively indicated by the term short-time state. In some cases, this term is used as a representative.

  In addition to the big hit, a small hit that opens the big winning opening may be provided by an opening pattern based on the number of times of opening and the opening time similar to the sudden big hit. When a small hit is made, after the small hit gaming state, both the big hit probability and the base are not changed from those before the start of the small hit gaming state. If such a small hit is provided, when it is not informed whether or not the probability change state has been made after the end of each hit gaming state of the sudden hit big hit and the small hit, seeing the open pattern, Even when the player recognizes which one has been executed, there are two types of hits that result in the same opening pattern, so it is difficult for the player to know whether or not it is in a probabilistic state. Even when the probability variation state is not actually set, the player's sense of expectation for the probability variation state can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the production control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 controls display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 provides an effect control command for instructing effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that allows signals to pass only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. And the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35 and the speaker 27 through the audio output board 70. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 is detected from the trigger sensor 121 via an input port (not shown). Enter. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via an input port (not shown). In addition, the production control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action of the engineer to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 to an input port (not shown). Input through. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via an output port (not shown), thereby causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (type, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 15R probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination) ). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types of 15R probability variable big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, and 2R normal big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In addition, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). To determine the variation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to make a big jackpot (normal jackpot or probable big hit) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5 (B) shows a case where a jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as a first holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the first start winning opening 13 (a variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). 1 is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when FIG. 5 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as a second holding memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (the second special symbol variable display is displayed). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed.

  Each of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C is a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. ), The type of jackpot is determined as one of “normal jackpot”, “probable big hit”, or “probable jackpot”, and is also referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type judgment table of FIG. 5 (B), there are numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value, and judgments corresponding to “normal jackpot”, “probable variation jackpot”, and “crash jackpot”. Value (big hit type judgment value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probable variation jackpot” (jackpot type judgment). Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the “surprise big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol “5” of the first special symbol.

  Using such a jackpot type jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value that matches the random 1 value as the jackpot type and matches the random 1 value as the jackpot symbol. Determine the winning jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5 (C), the ratios determined for the jackpots that are in a high probability state are the same. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table has a higher ratio of selection of big hits (15 round big hits) with a larger number of rounds in the big hit gaming state than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and the jackpot game There is a high ratio of selecting big hits (15 round big hits) with a substantial number of possible winnings in the state. Therefore, when the second special symbol is a big hit than the first special symbol, the player has a higher degree of advantage with respect to winning the big prize opening (for example, there are substantially more rounds that can be won). The game is controlled to a big hit gaming state as an advantageous state.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the sudden big hit is not selected in the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5C, the abrupt big hit can be selected, but more accurate than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B. Data may be set so that the selection ratio for jackpots is high.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. 6 shows specific command data regarding the effect control command, and the relationship between the name of the command and the designated content of the command. In the game control microcomputer 560 for effect control commands, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state, as shown in FIG.

  The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (XX is a variation pattern number). And each command 80XX corresponds to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. Since the variation pattern command is transmitted with a value specifying the variation pattern set in the EXT data, a variation pattern command different for each variation pattern is transmitted. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device to start the effect symbol variation display.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden hit jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round, the command indicating that the special prize opening is open is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) for opening the big prize opening designating round 1 is transmitted, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The commands A301 to A303 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden hit jackpot).

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability / low base state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  The command C001 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting opening has been won. The command C002 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that a start winning has been won at the second start opening.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are effect control commands (winning time determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. In the case of the first start port, XX is 01, and in the case of the second start port, XX is 02. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a display result prefetching command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation pattern prefetch command indicating what variation pattern is to be obtained from the winning determination result. In the case of the first start port, XX is 01, and in the case of the second start port, XX is 02.

  These display result prefetching commands and variation pattern prefetching commands are commands that are transmitted when a start winning is generated. The game control microcomputer 560 extracts random numbers from random 1 to random 3 and stores them as reserved storage information when a start winning occurs, and based on the reserved information by determining these random numbers at the same time. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation and the result of the hit are judged. This is called “look ahead”. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result prefetch command and the variation pattern prefetch command based on the prefetch result to the effect control board 80.

  The variation pattern includes a plurality of types of variation patterns depending on the variation time, whether to reach, whether to reach, whether to win or not. The variation pattern of “reach out” means a display result that forms a reach symbol, but a display result that is a deviated display result as a combination of display results of all symbols, or a variation pattern that derives such a display result.

  The types of variation patterns are divided into a plurality of types such as “non-reach”, “normal reach”, “long reach”, and “super reach”, for example. The type of “non-reach out” is a type that does not become reach but becomes out of reach. As described above, the type of “super reach” is a type set so that a big hit is likely to occur. The “normal reach” type is a type in which the variation time is relatively short among the types set so that the big hit is unlikely to occur compared to the super reach type. The “long reach” type is a type in which the variation time is longer than the normal reach among the types set so that the big hit is less likely to occur than the super reach type. The ROM 54 of the game control microcomputer 560 stores a variation pattern type determination table indicating the correspondence between the random value for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the variation pattern type to be selected.

  As the variation pattern type determination table, a table used when the display result is out of place, a table selected when the display result is a probable big hit, a table selected when the display result is an odd big hit, There is a table that is selected when the display result is usually a big hit. For example, in the variation pattern type determination table used when there is a deviation, the determination value of the random value (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 0 to 99 for the variation pattern type of non-reach, the variation pattern of normal reach The type is determined to be 100 to 199, the long reach variation pattern type is 200 to 229, and the super reach variation pattern type is 230 to 251.

  In each variation pattern type determination table, a random value (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to each selectable variation pattern type.

  One or more variation patterns belong to each variation pattern type. For example, the variation pattern type of “non-reach” is “no reach A”, “no reach B”, the variation pattern type of “normal reach” is normal reach A, normal reach B, and the variation pattern type of “long reach” is long. Each variation pattern of super reach A and super reach B belongs to the variation pattern type of reach A, long reach B, and “super reach”. Different variation patterns of the same type have different variation times (to the extent that they do not become other types) or the contents of the production. The ROM 54 of the game control microcomputer 560 stores, for each variation pattern type, a variation pattern determination table that indicates the correspondence between the variation pattern random number (random 3) and the variation pattern to be selected.

  When selecting and determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern type is determined using the random value for determining the variation pattern (random 2), and then the variation pattern is determined using the random value for determining the variation pattern (random 3). The

  Further, the table used for determining the variation pattern as described above (the table for determining the variation pattern type and the table for determining the variation pattern) includes a table for the normal state (low base state) and a time reduction state (high base state). State) and time table. The change pattern is determined using these tables depending on the gaming state. For example, the table used for determining the variation pattern in the short-time state is, for example, a variation pattern that becomes reach (particularly, a variation pattern of super reach) as compared with the table used to determine the variation pattern in the normal state. Data is set so that the ratio of selecting a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is low. Since the variation pattern is selected at such a ratio, as a result, the average variation time is shorter in the time-short state than in the normal state (non-time-short state).

  The table used to determine the variation pattern in the short-time state has the same selection ratio of each variation pattern as compared to the table used to determine the variation pattern in the normal state, but the variation time of each variation pattern is the same. It may be shorter than that in the normal state. For example, by selecting a table used for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time is halved compared to that in the normal state in the time reduction state, the average variation time is controlled to be shorter in the time reduction state. be able to.

  Further, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern may be controlled so as to be changed in accordance with the number of reserved memories when starting the fluctuation display. For example, a variation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved memories when starting variable display is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, and a variation pattern determination table used when it is less than the predetermined number B is provided. The variation pattern determination table A associates each variation pattern with the random number random 3 so that the variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected in comparison with the variation pattern determination table B. In this way, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is easy to select a variation pattern with a short variation time, and it is possible to promote digestion of the reserved memory. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of an invalid start prize that is not stored on hold even though the start prize has been won.

  As described above, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM and the random number value (random 3) extracted for the variation pattern determination.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data (holding storage information) such as random numbers corresponding to holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side.

  As shown in FIG. 7, on the game control microcomputer 560 side, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is stored in the first reserved memory buffer as the first reserved memory means. Is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer as the second reserved storage means. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store data such as random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number.

  In such a first hold storage buffer, hold storage data such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is stored. In the second hold storage buffer, determination result hold storage data corresponding to hold storage data such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is stored.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, game state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (random number circuit 503 is initially set), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and a special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning award in a predetermined order. The value of the symbol process flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 outputs, as information to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, information (data) relating to the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example. Is output (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S311). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) is a process for performing control such as determination of a variation pattern and start of timing of a variation time timer. In this variation pattern setting process, in addition to the variation pattern command, one of the first and second symbol variation designation commands is transmitted according to which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed. .

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process that advances the process to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the fluctuation time corresponding to the decided fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is a process of performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), a control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. It is processing. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening. When all the rounds are finished, the process shifts to a big hit end process. The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. The CPU 56 checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is turned on (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). Specifically, in the process of S1214, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are stored. (Stored). With regard to the following description regarding the hold storage, it may be indicated as “hold stored” that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer.

  Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the time reduction flag (the flag set when the time reduction state and the high base state are set) is set (S1215A) and whether or not the big hit state is being set (S1215B). If the hourly flag is not set and the game is not in the big hit state, the CPU 56 executes a winning determination process (S1216). The determination process at the time of winning is based on the data of various random numbers stored in association with the detected start winning, whether or not the variation display corresponding to the starting winning is a big hit, the big hit type, the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern Is a process of executing a process of determining in advance not at the start of the variable display but at the start winning prize. Next, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 100 a display result look-ahead command that can identify the determination result of the jackpot type at the time of starting winning (the determination of whether or not the jackpot and the determination result of the jackpot type). The display result prefetch command transmission process to be executed is executed (S1217). Further, the CPU 56 executes a variation pattern prefetch command transmission process for transmitting a variation pattern prefetch command that can specify the detected variation pattern determination result at the time of start winning to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218).

  In the case where either the time reduction flag is set or in the case of the big hit state, the CPU 56 does not execute the processing from S1216 to S1218, and advances the processing to S1219.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command (S1219). When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  If it is determined in S1211 that the first start port switch is not in the ON state, if it is determined in S1212 that the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, or a first start winning designation command is transmitted in S1219. After performing the control, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (S1221). If the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the process is terminated. If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (S1222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter has reached the upper limit value, the process is terminated.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of saving (storing) them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). Specifically, in the process of S1224, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are stored. (Stored).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a winning determination process similar to S1216 (S1226). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a display result prefetch command that can specify the detected display result at the time of starting winning a prize (determination of whether or not the big hit and determination of the big hit type) to the effect control microcomputer 100. A prefetch command transmission process is executed (S1227). Further, the CPU 56 executes a variation pattern prefetch command transmission process for transmitting a variation pattern prefetch command that can specify the detected variation pattern determination result at the time of start winning to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228). Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command (S1229) and ends the process.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the winning time determination process in S1216 and S1226. In the winning determination process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in S1214 and S1224 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not to perform (S220).

  In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit in the special symbol normal processing and the big hit type are determined, or the variation pattern (variation pattern type) is determined in the variation pattern setting processing. In addition, the display of the variation based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball starts to win the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 separately. Before being awarded, a winning determination process is executed to determine whether or not to win in advance, and the type and variation pattern of the jackpot in advance. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern are predicted in advance before the variation display of the production symbol is executed, and the production control CPU 101 produces the production based on the determination result at the time of winning, as will be described later. A pre-reading notice is executed to predict that a big hit will be given while the symbols are changing.

  In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice can be executed only for the first special symbol when it is not in the high base state and in the big hit state, and only the second special symbol is executed in the high base state and the big hit state. A pre-reading notice can be executed as a target. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in any state, the pre-reading notice may be executed for both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the pre-reading notice may be executed for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the low base state, and for the second special symbol during the high base state. Good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability high base state and high probability low base state). It is confirmed whether or not a probability variation flag (high probability flag) indicating that it is set is included (S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in S1214 and S1224 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (S222).

  It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays may be executed after confirming whether or not the state of probability variation has been made in S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display based on the start winning is actually started. is there. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, depending on the number of times of change) after confirming in S221 whether or not it is in a probable variation state at the time of starting winning, until the actual display of variation based on that starting winning is started. When the game state changes, the game state may change from the probability change state to the normal state between the change count up to 100 times and after 100 times. Therefore, the gaming state determined in S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see S61 to be described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change of the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in S222), the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data indicating “out of” in the display result prefetch command. (S223).

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in S220 or S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in S1214 and S1224. (S226). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning determination process of S1215 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first special) shown in FIG. It is determined whether the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “surprise big hit”, or “normal big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning determination process of S1226 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 5C is used. It is used to determine whether the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “surprise big hit”, or “normal big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type as a display result prefetch command (S227). For example, if it is determined that “probability big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data indicating “probability big hit” in the display result prefetch command. In addition, when it is determined that the “surprise big hit” is obtained, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data indicating “the big hit big hit” in the display result prefetch command. Further, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data indicating the “normal big hit” in the display result prefetch command.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) extracted in steps S1214 and S1224 to change the display results set in steps S223 and S225. The pattern is determined (S226). For example, in S226, with respect to the reserved storage data to be determined for the variation pattern, the table used for determining the variation pattern is selected based on the display result of the variation display based on the reserved storage data, and the variation pattern type determination is performed. The variation pattern type and the variation pattern type are determined using the random number for random use (random 2) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3). This determination is performed by the same method as the above-described determination of the variation pattern type and the variation pattern type. For example, if the random number value of the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is 240, it is within the range of the determination value of the super reach variation pattern type, and therefore, it is determined to be the super reach variation pattern type. Further, it is determined whether the variation pattern is the super reach A or the super reach B depending on whether the random number for the variation pattern determination (random 3) is the determination value of the super reach A or the determination value of the super reach B. Is done.

  It should be noted that the determination based on the game state change or the like may be made based on information such as the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number in the holding storage buffer when the start winning is generated.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variation pattern prefetch command (S227). For example, when the variation pattern of super reach A is determined, the EXT data corresponding to super reach A is set in the variation pattern prefetch command.

  In addition, there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed after confirming whether or not the time is short in S221 at the time of starting winning, and before starting the changing display based on the starting winning actually. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed from the time when it is determined whether or not the time is short in S226 to the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the game state is changed depending on the number of times of change). In the case of a change, the gaming state may change from the short-time state to the normal state at the time when the number of changes is up to 100 times and after 100 times. Therefore, the gaming state determined in S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation do not always match.

  In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change of the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good. In addition, the game state when the variation display based on the hold storage data is executed based on the data indicating the game state such as the time reduction flag and the time reduction counter for the hold storage data to be determined for the variation pattern And selecting a table to be used for determining the variation pattern based on the display result of the variation display based on the reserved storage data, the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), the variation pattern determination random number The variation pattern is determined using (Random 3).

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is stored data in the second reserved memory buffer, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S53). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a depends on whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 8a performs the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. It is. On the other hand, when the data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 8b based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer. Is done.

  If there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer by the control of S52 to S54, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the second reserved memory data is It is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data in the first reserved memory. That is, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially established over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, when there is reserved storage data corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol and the variable display is executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Are stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  One is subtracted from the count value of the total pending memory number counter formed in the RAM 55 and counting the total pending memory number (S57). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S60). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S307 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the holding storage buffer, and executes a jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1225 of the start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the big hit To do. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 5) with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-probability change state (normal game state, low probability state). Has been. Specifically, a probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. In the idle state or the short time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S61), the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game (S307 in FIG. 9), and then the condition that the special symbol and the effect symbol are displayed a predetermined number of times or the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the variable display is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing to stop display.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in S61), the process proceeds to S75 described later.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values in S61, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (S71). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 5C. One of the determination tables is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the big hit type determination random number extracted in the start switch passing processing and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and uses the big hit type determination table selected in S72 to hold the The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value matching the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the buffer is determined (S73).

  As shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the big hit type and the big hit symbol is set so that the big hit type is different for each big hit type, Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control corresponding to the big hit type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Further, the CPU 56 indicates the determined jackpot type and sets the jackpot type data in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “01” is set as the big hit type data. When the big hit type is “surprise big hit”, “02” is set as the big hit type data. When the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “03” is set as the jackpot type data.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a special symbol stop symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−”, which is a lost symbol, is set as a special symbol stop symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in S73 is set as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be “probable variation jackpot”, “7” is set as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined to be “successful big hit”, “5” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the jackpot type is determined as “normal jackpot”, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process.

  In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the special symbol variation display, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. In step S130, a stop symbol is derived and displayed. If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 is set (S131). Thereby, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139.

  When the big hit flag is set, the set flag of the probability variation flag and the short time flag is reset (S134), and the big hit start 1 designation is specified in the production control microcomputer 100 according to the determined hit type. One of the command, jackpot start 2 designation command, or jackpot start 3 designation command (big hit start designation command) is set (S135).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to return the control state to the normal state once when the big hit occurs (S136).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot control timer (S137), and the special symbol process flag is opened to the jackpot opening. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the preprocessing (S305) (S138). Thereafter, in the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the big winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and a round is started.

  If it is determined in S132 that the big hit flag has not been set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state has been set (S140). In the present embodiment, the hour / short flag is set until the fluctuation display that is out of place is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) after any of the big hits of the normal big hit, the probable big hit, and the sudden big hit. When the hour / short flag is set, either the high-accuracy base state or the low-accuracy base state is set. If the time reduction flag is not set, the process proceeds to S146. As a result, in the low-accuracy low-base state that is neither the probability variation state nor the short-time state, the low-accuracy low-base state is maintained when the variability display that is out of place ends. On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter that indicates the number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in the time reduction state (high base state) (remaining number of times) is decremented by 1 (S141).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (S143). If the value of the time reduction counter has not become 0, the process proceeds to S146 described later. As a result, in the time reduction state, the time reduction state due to the high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display that is out of place is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times). On the other hand, the time reduction flag is reset when the value of the time reduction counter reaches 0, and the probability variation flag is also reset if the probability variation flag is set (S144). As a result, when the high-accuracy base state or the low-accuracy base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, if the fluctuation display that is out of place does not occur until a predetermined number of times (100 times is executed), the low Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S145), and proceeds to S146, whereby fluctuations that are out of place in the time-saving state are obtained. When the display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the time-short state due to the high base state ends, and the state shifts to the low probability low base state.

  In addition to the short-time counter, a probabilistic variable counter is provided that indicates the number of times that the special symbol can be changed (remaining frequency) in the probabilistic state (high probability state). The end of the probabilistic state is controlled by the probable variable counter. May be.

  When the process proceeds to step S146, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  As a result of the variable display, when the big win is achieved, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305), the big winning opening open processing (S306), and the big winning end processing (S307) are executed to control the big winning game state. Is done.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the big prize winning control timer set before the big hit end process is executed (S150). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (S151). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has elapsed, the big hit flag is reset (S152).

  Next, based on the big hit type data described above, it is confirmed whether the big hit type to be ended is a probability variation big hit or a sudden big hit (S153). In S153, the jackpot type is confirmed based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55. When the type of jackpot to be ended is a probability big hit or a sudden big hit, a probability variation flag is set (S154). Thus, the high probability state is controlled. Then, in order to specify the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, a probability change state designation command is transmitted (S155). Thereby, in the production control microcomputer 100, it is recognized that it is in a certain change state. When the type of jackpot to be finished is not a probability big hit or a sudden big hit, the probability variation flag is not set and the process proceeds to S157.

  Next, a time reduction flag is set (S157). As a result, the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, when the time reduction flag is set and controlled to the time reduction state, control is also made to the high base state based on the setting of the time reduction flag (while the time reduction flag is not set). Sometimes in a low base state). After the time reduction flag is set, a time reduction state designation command is transmitted in order to identify the gaming state after the big hit gaming state (S158). Thereby, in the production control microcomputer 100, it is recognized that the time is short.

  Next, the value of the time reduction counter is updated to 100 (S160). Then, in order to specify the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, a time reduction number designation command is transmitted (S161). Thereafter, in S163, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and the process is terminated. In the case of the present embodiment, by S153 to S160, the probability variation flag is not set at the time of normal big hit, but the time reduction flag is set, so that the low probability high base state is set after the big hit gaming state, and the probability variation big hit and the sudden big hit In each case, the probability variation flag is set and the time reduction flag is set, so that a high probability and high base state is established after the big hit gaming state.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 as effect control means will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  On the side of the effect control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 31 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is, for example, an interruption that occurs when an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77 among the input ports included in the I / O. Take in. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in an effect control buffer setting unit in a RAM mounted on the effect control board 80, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads out various effect control commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer, analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command. Is set (command analysis processing: S704).

  In this embodiment, the data constituting the production side hold storage buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting unit. The effect-side reserved memory buffer includes an effect-side reserved memory buffer for the first special symbol and an effect-side reserved memory buffer for the second special symbol. Each production-side reserved storage buffer corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (“4”) of the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Area) is provided. When there is a start prize at the first start prize slot 13 or the second start prize slot 14, commands such as a first or second start prize designation command, a display result prefetch command, and a variation pattern prefetch command are displayed on the main board. 31 to the effect control board 80.

  The effect control CPU 101 distinguishes the command in the order received at the time of the start winning, based on the first or second start winning designation command, corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The command thus stored is stored in an empty area of the production-side reserved storage buffer for the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol. If the command is normally received, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4” in each rendering side on-hold storage buffer. The stored command is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area (the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) every time the display of variation of the effect design is started. Shifted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes corresponding to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, a random number for determining the stop symbol for the effect symbol and a random number for determining the selection of various effect contents (an effect pattern for pre-reading notice (change pattern of change display, change timing, change effect, and change gas effect to be described later)) And random number update processing for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers (such as other random numbers for effect determination) (S706). Further, a hold memory display control process for controlling the display state of the first hold memory display unit 18c and the second hold memory display unit 18d is executed (S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702.

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the production device such as the speaker 27, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  For example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped. The fluctuation display is controlled so as to be executed at a fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command. Further, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined based on determining whether the game is out of play or jackpot based on the display result designation command and determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit.

  For example, when the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit are obtained, a big hit display result (a display result of a doublet) determined in advance corresponding to the big hit type is determined. When the winning hit is a winning big hit, the chance of a combination of symbols other than the big winning symbol combination is determined as the display result. When it is a big hit, it includes the case where the chance is the display result after reaching the reach state. In addition, when it is out of place, the combination of the left, middle, and right effect designs that do not have a flat eye is randomly determined as the result of the out-of-order display. However, if the change pattern command is a command that specifies that the reach is out of reach, the result of the out-of-order display that can form a reach design in which the left and right symbols are aligned during the change display is determined. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command is a command that specifies that the reach pattern is not reached (usually change), the display result of non-reach that does not form a reach design in which the left and right symbols are aligned during the change display (non-reach) Determine the detachment.

  Further, when normal reach is designated in the variation pattern command, a reach effect corresponding to normal reach is performed. When a long reach is designated in the variation pattern command, a reach effect corresponding to each type of long reach is performed. Furthermore, when super reach is designated in the variation pattern command, reach effects corresponding to each type of super reach are performed.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 16, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) executes a prefetch notice determination process (S700) to be described later.

  Unlike the reach effect, during the effect symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, or an effect operation different from the effect symbol variation display operation, such as a message image display or voice output, etc. Depending on the situation, there is a possibility that the variation display state of the production symbol will be in the reach state, there is a possibility that the reach production by super reach may be executed, or the variation display result may be a “hit” Etc., a notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance.

  The notice effect includes a notice effect called a prefetch notice effect (also referred to as a prefetch notice). In the pre-reading notice effect, the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) of the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is executed. It is a notice effect that warns of the possibility of becoming. In comparison with the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the start of the variable display to be notified is called a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice or a notice effect during variable display). Here, the pre-reading notice effect is a jackpot notice effect, but may be a notice effect for notifying the possibility of reaching.

  In the effect control process, after executing the pre-reading notice determination process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the change display of the effect symbol is realized. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): A process for performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  Effect symbol variation start process (S801): This is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (effect symbol) to be started.

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Processing for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern.

  Effect symbol variation stop process (S803): This is a process of performing control to stop the variation display of the effect symbol (effect symbol) and derive and display the display result of the variation display (final stop symbol).

  Big hit display process (S804): This is a process of performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big win after the end of the variation time.

  In-round processing (S805): Processing for performing display control during a round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to post-round processing, and if the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing.

  Post-round processing (S806): processing for controlling display between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing.

  Big hit end effect process (S807): In the effect display device 9, it is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice determination process executed in S700 of FIG. Referring to FIG. 17, in the pre-reading notice determination process, effect control CPU 101 first receives the first and second start winning designation commands by confirming the data in the effect side holding storage buffer. It is determined whether or not (S720). If it is determined that it has not been received, the effect control CPU 101 ends the prefetch notice determination process and returns the process to be executed to the caller process. On the other hand, when determining that it has been received, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not a start winning-related command including a display result prefetch command and a variation pattern prefetch command has been newly received (S721). Specifically, in S721, based on referring to the value of the prefetch determination processed data in the effect side storage buffer, it is determined whether there is data indicating the newly received start winning related command, It is confirmed whether or not a command related to starting prize is newly received.

  If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the effect control CPU 101 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S725 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that a new command has been received, the process to be executed proceeds to S723A.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the presentation side on-hold storage buffer that is an area for storing data corresponding to the on-hold storage on the presentation control microcomputer 100 side. Referring to FIG. 18, each of the effect-side reserved storage buffer for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 18A and the effect-side reserved storage buffer for the second special symbol shown in FIG. Similarly to the reserved storage buffer on the game control microcomputer 560 side described in 7, the storage areas corresponding to the upper limit values (4 in the present embodiment) of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are respectively It is secured. The effect side reserved storage buffer for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is formed in the RAM 103.

  In the production-side reserved storage buffer, display results (disappearance, normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden hit big hit), and variation pattern prefetch command associated with each of the first and second hold memories are shown. Predetermined data such as data for specifying the variation pattern (type and type of variation pattern) indicated by is stored.

  Further, in the effect-side hold storage buffer, various processes described later related to the determination of the effect of the pre-reading notice are performed, so that the change pattern and the change timing and the character B gase execution are associated with each of the hold memories. Data specifying the completed flag is stored. The change pattern indicates a pattern for changing the hold display. The change timing indicates a timing at which the hold display is changed. The character B gasse execution completion flag is a flag indicating whether or not the character B gasse effect has been executed. Although illustration is omitted, each pre-reading determination processed data indicating whether or not there is data indicating the newly received start winning-related command is stored in the production side hold storage buffer. Stored in correspondence with the data indicating the start winning-related command. As the pre-reading determination processed data, data indicating that execution has been performed when determination processing (S723A to S725, S726 to S729 in FIG. 17) related to the effect of the pre-reading notice as described later is executed. As described above, the data stored in the storage areas “1” to “4” in such an effect-side reserved storage buffer is stored in the first storage area ( The area stored in the buffer number “1”) is deleted, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted.

  FIG. 24 is a display screen diagram for explaining the effect display for changing the hold display. As shown in FIGS. 24 (A) to 24 (C), the hold memory indicated by the hold display of the first hold memory display unit 18c is digested, and the effect display device 9 produces the left, middle, and right effect symbols 91. , 92, 93 are displayed.

  When it is determined to perform the pre-reading notice effect for the hold display, as shown in FIG. 24D, the character 95 is displayed on the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol variation display is started. . Then, as shown in FIG. 24E, when the character 95 acts on the hold display, the “change effect” for changing the hold display from the white white mode hold display 18cA to the colored mode hold display 18cB different from white. , Or as shown in FIG. 24 (F), it is assumed that the character 95 acts on the hold display, and the “change gaze effect” that does not actually change and the white state hold display 18cA does not change is executed. . Here, the “action” on the hold display is an effect that the character 95 hits the hold display with a hammer, but is not limited to this, and is an effect that gives the player the impression that the hold display is changed. That's fine. In addition, as an effect when the white state hold display 18cA does not change, an effect in which the character 95 acts on the hold display but the white state hold display 18cA does not change may be performed.

  Character 95 is character A, and character B is a character having a shape different from that of character 95, although not shown. As shown in FIG. 27, which will be described later, the character B may be a character 95B having the same shape as the character 95 but having a different pattern or color (for example, a hair pattern or color).

  Returning to FIG. 17, next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a new first winning prize has been received (a first starting prize designation command has been received) (S <b> 723 </ b> A). When it is determined that the first start winning is made, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the time-short state and the big hit state (during the big hit game state) (steps S723B and S723C). The effect control microcomputer 100 stores in the RAM 103 game state specifying data for specifying whether or not the current game state is a short-time state and a probable change state, and the game state specification data is stored in the normal state as described above. The current gaming state can be recognized by updating when receiving the state command, the short time state command, and the probability changing state command. The determination as to whether or not the time is short in step S723B is made by confirming the game state specifying data. In addition, the determination as to whether or not the big hit gaming state is in step S723C is based on the value of the above-described effect control process flag, S804 to S807 (may be limited to rounds such as S805 and S806). This is performed by confirming whether or not an effect related to the big hit gaming state is being executed.

  If it is determined that the first start winning is not newly made, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the second start winning is newly received (the second start winning designation command is received) (S723D). ). When it is determined that the second start winning is made, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is in the short-time state or the big hit state (in the big hit game state) (steps S723E, S723F).

  Note that, as shown in steps S1215A to S1218 in FIG. 10, during the time-short state (high base state) or big hit state, a command for pre-reading advance notice for the first start winning (display result pre-read command, change) Pattern prefetch command) is not sent. When a command for pre-reading notice (display result pre-reading command, variation pattern pre-reading command) is received in step S721, the first start winning is always not in the short-time state or the big hit state. Therefore, if YES is determined in step S721, it is always determined NO in steps S723B and S723C if YES is determined in step S723A. Therefore, the processing from step S723A to step S723C may be omitted.

  When it is determined that the first start winning is made during the short-time state or the big hit state, and when it is judged that the second start winning is made and neither the short-time state nor the big hit state is in effect, the effect control CPU 101 Then, the process to be executed is advanced to step S725.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first start winning is not in the short-time state and the big hit state, and when it is determined that the second start winning is in the short-time state or the big hit state, the CPU 101 for effect control Determines whether the display result indicated by the display result prefetch command is a big hit or the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern prefetch command is a super reach variation pattern based on the newly received start winning-related command (S724). This determination is made based on whether the EXT data of the display result prefetch command is a big hit or the EXT data of the variation pattern prefetch command is data indicating super reach. If it is determined that neither of these is true, the effect control CPU 101 advances the process to be executed to step S725.

  In step S725, the production control CPU 101 displays the current reserved storage in a normal manner (white in the present embodiment). After that, the effect control CPU 101 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result is a big hit or a super reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the big hit or the super reach is lost, and a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories. Based on the above, a change pattern of the hold display is determined (S726). Here, the change pattern is determined based on whether it is a big hit or super-reaching, but is not limited to this. The determination may be based on whether the super reach is a big hit or the super reach is off. In other words, when it is a big hit but not super reach, the change pattern of the hold display may not be determined.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram of a change pattern determination table. Referring to FIG. 19, the change pattern for changing the hold display does not change (keep white) “no change (white)”, “blue” to change to blue, “red” to change to red. And a pattern of “blue → red” that changes from blue to red before digestion of the reserved memory is included.

  In the change pattern determination table, allocation of random values of random counters for change pattern determination for each change pattern is determined according to whether the jackpot or super-reach is off and the number of reserved storage. In the process of determining the change pattern as in S726, a random value for determining the change pattern is extracted, and the change pattern corresponding to the extracted value is selected and determined using the change pattern determination table.

  In this change pattern determination table, the distribution is determined so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the case of “red” than in the case of “blue” or “no change (white)”. In other words, when the big hit is determined, the “red (white)” and “blue” ratios for the ratios where “no change (white)” and “blue” are determined are less than when the super reach is determined to be off. The distribution is determined so that the rate at which "

  Further, in this change pattern determination table, the distribution is determined so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the case of “blue → red” than in the case of “red”. In other words, the ratio of “blue → red” to the ratio of “red” is determined in the case where it is determined to be a big hit, compared to the case where it is determined to be out of super reach. The distribution is determined so as to be high.

  If “blue” or “red” is determined as the change pattern when the number of reserved storages is 1, the reserved display is displayed in blue or red from the beginning without white display.

  Returning to FIG. 17, next, the CPU 101 for effect control determines a change timing for changing the hold display based on the table corresponding to the determined change pattern (S727).

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of a change timing determination table. Referring to FIG. 20, FIG. 20A is a change timing determination table when it is determined to be a big hit and “blue” or “red” is determined as the change pattern. FIG. 20B is a change timing determination table when it is determined that superreach is out of place and “blue” or “red” is determined as the change pattern. FIG. 20C is a change timing determination table when it is determined to be a big hit and “blue → red” is determined as the change pattern. FIG. 20D is a change timing determination table when it is determined that super-reach is lost and “blue → red” is determined as the change pattern.

  The change timing when the change pattern of “blue” or “red” is determined is “at the time of winning” which is changed at the timing of the start winning prize, and from the white to blue at the timing of the second variation display after the winning of the start prize. Or “white → blue / red” to change to red, “white → white → blue / red” to change from white to blue or red at the timing of the third variation display after starting winning, “White → white → white → blue / red” that changes from white to blue or red at the timing of the fourth variation display from the beginning to the beginning is included. Note that whether to change to “blue” or “red” at the timing of “blue / red” is determined according to the result selected using the change pattern determination table of FIG.

  When the change pattern of “blue → red” is determined, the change timing is “blue → red”, which is changed in the order of blue and red in two fluctuation displays, and blue, red, red in three fluctuation displays. Change in the order of “blue → red → red”, change in blue, blue, red in the order of three changes “blue → blue → red”, change in order of white, blue, red in the order of three changes Change in “white → blue → red”, change in blue, red, red, red in the order of 4 changes “blue → red → red → red” change in order of blue, blue, red in 4 changes display , Change in the order of red “blue → blue → red → red”, change in blue, blue, blue, red in the order of 4 changes display “blue → blue → blue → red”, change in the order of 4 times Change white, white, blue, red in the order of “white → white → blue → red” and change white, blue, blue, red in the order of 4 fluctuations, “white → blue → blue → red” , And change in the order of white, blue, red, red in four fluctuation displays To include "white → blue → red → red".

  In the change timing determination table, distribution of random numbers of random counters for change timing determination with respect to respective change timings is determined according to the change pattern, jackpot or superreach, and the number of reserved memories. In the process of determining the change timing as in S727, a random number for determining the change timing is extracted, and the change timing corresponding to the extracted value is selected and determined using the change timing determination table.

  In the change timing determination table for the change pattern of “blue” or “red”, the expectation that becomes a big hit is higher when changing in the slow timing fluctuation display than when changing in the early timing fluctuation display. As described above, the distribution is determined. In other words, when it is determined to be a big hit, the late timing relative to the rate at which the change timing to change to blue or red is determined earlier than when the super reach is determined to be off The distribution is determined so that the rate at which the change timing for changing to blue or red is determined becomes high.

  Moreover, in the change timing determination table for the change pattern of “blue → red”, in the change timing determination table, the red color in the late timing variation display changes to the red color in the early timing variation display. However, the distribution is determined so that the expectation level for a big hit is high. In other words, when it is determined to be a big hit, it is red at a later timing relative to the rate at which the change timing to change to red is determined at an earlier timing than when it is determined to be a super-reaching shift. The distribution is determined so that the rate at which the change timing to be changed is determined is high.

  Returning to FIG. 17, next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change pattern and change timing as data related to the corresponding start winning in the effect side holding storage buffer as shown in FIG. 18 ( S728). Then, the production control CPU 101 displays the hold display for the current hold storage in the form (color) of the first stage of the determined change pattern. After that, the effect control CPU 101 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process executed in S801 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbol corresponding to the display result of the variation display based on the received display result designation command (S500). The stop symbol may be determined based on the fluctuation pattern command.

  Specifically, in S500, when a big hit variation pattern is designated, the stop symbol of the effect symbol that is the jackpot display result set corresponding to each big hit is determined, and the variation pattern that becomes the reach by the loss is designated. If a change pattern that does not become reach due to a loss is specified, the stop symbol of the effect symbol that results in a non-reach symbol and an outlier display is determined. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a prefetch notice setting process (S501). The pre-reading notice setting process is a process for determining a specific aspect for the basic form of the change effect determined in the pre-read notice determination process of FIG. 17 at the time of starting winning immediately before the change display in which the change effect is executed. It is. The prefetch notice setting process will be described later.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a notice other than the look-ahead notice (a notice effect such as a jackpot notice executed only in one variation), and determines an effect mode when the notice is executed. The process is performed (S502).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol determined in S500, the change pattern specified by the change pattern command, the change effect determined by the above-described prefetch notice setting process, and the determination in S502. An effect control pattern that enables execution of various effects such as a notice effect, which is executed with the current variation display, is determined (S503).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern determined in S503 (S504). Specifically, the ROM 102 stores a plurality of types of process table data capable of executing various types of effect control, and the effect control pattern determined as described above can be executed from among the plurality of types of data. Is selected in S504. Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table (S505).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs various effect devices (the effect display device 9 as effect parts, the effect data) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of various lamps as parts and the speaker 27 as an effect part is started (S506). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of the light emitters such as various LEDs. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the change time specified by the change pattern command in the change time timer (S507), and the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect symbol changing process (S802). (S508).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice setting process executed in step S501 of FIG. FIG. 22A shows the main process of the prefetch notice setting process. Referring to FIG. 22A, in the prefetch notice setting process, first, the production control CPU 101 determines which of the first and second symbol variation designation commands has been received in order to perform the present variation display. Based on the confirmation of the data in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined whether or not it is at the start of the variation of the first special symbol (S511). If it is determined that the first special symbol variation start time, the effect control CPU 101 executes the detailed setting process of the pre-reading notice for the first reserved memory (S512). The detailed setting process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time of starting the change of the first special symbol, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not it is the time of starting the change of the second special symbol by checking the same data as in S511 ( S513). If it is determined that the second special symbol variation starts, the effect control CPU 101 executes detailed setting processing for prefetching advance notice for the second reserved memory (S514). The detailed setting process will be described later.

  After step S512, step S514, and when it is determined that the second special symbol change is not started, the effect control CPU 101 returns the process to be executed to the effect symbol change start process of the calling source of this process. In addition, since it cannot be NO in step S513, the process of step S513 may be omitted.

  FIG. 22B shows a detailed setting process which is a subroutine of a prefetch notice setting process. Referring to FIG. 22B, in the detailed setting process, for the first or second reserved memory that is the target of the detailed setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first stores the data in the effect-side reserved storage buffer. By checking, it is determined whether or not there is a next reserved memory (S515).

  When it is determined that there is the next reserved memory, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect-side reserved memory buffer in FIG. 18 and determines whether or not the reserved memory is the reserved memory for which the changed effect is to be executed. Is determined (S516). Specifically, it is determined whether or not “blue”, “red”, or “blue → red” is stored as a change pattern of the reserved storage in the rendering side reserved storage buffer.

  If it is determined that the hold storage with the change effect is present, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect-side hold memory buffer of FIG. 18 and the hold memory is the hold memory whose change display is the current change display. It is determined whether or not there is (S517). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the mode (color) of the pending display of the current variation display is changed at the change timing of the pending storage in the rendering side on-hold storage buffer.

  When it is determined that the hold memory has reached the change timing, the effect control CPU 101, based on the change effect determination table, shows a specific aspect of the change effect for the hold memory (in this embodiment, the character A or A mode of which one of the characters B acts on the hold display) is determined (S518). The information that can specify the determined change effect is stored in the RAM 103 together with information that can specify the number of the change effect for the reserved storage. In step S503 of FIG. 21 described above, an effect control pattern for executing a change effect is determined based on this storage, and the change effect is executed based on the effect control pattern in step S506. Is executed.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram of a change effect determination table and a change gas effect determination table. Referring to FIG. 23A, the change effect determination table is a change effect for a specific mode of change effect (a mode of which character A or character B acts on hold display) according to the change pattern. Distribution of random values of the random counter for determination is defined. In the process of determining the change effect as in S518, a random value for change effect determination is extracted, and the change effect corresponding to the extracted value is selected and determined using the change effect determination table.

  In the change effect determination table, the distribution is determined so that the direction in which the effect by the character B is executed is higher than the case in which the effect by the character A is executed. That is, in the case of determining the change effect, the distribution is determined so that the rate at which the change effect by the character B is determined is higher than the rate at which the change effect by the character A is determined.

  Further, in the change effect determination table, the expectation that the hold display changes to a more expected aspect (red) when the change effect by the character B is executed than when the change effect by the character A is executed. The distribution is determined so that the degree becomes high. That is, the distribution is determined so that the ratio of the change effect by the character B to the ratio of the change effect by the character A is higher in the case of the red change than in the case of the blue change. .

  The correspondence relationship between the change effect mode and the expectation may be another relationship. For example, when the change effect by the character A is executed, the expectation to change to blue or red is higher than when the change effect by the character B is executed, but when the change effect by the character B is executed, The distribution may be determined so that the degree of expectation for changing to a mode with a high degree of expectation (red) is higher than when the change effect by the character A is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 22, after step S <b> 518, the effect control CPU 101 returns the process to be executed to step S <b> 515 and determines whether or not there is a next reserved memory. Thus, the processing from step S516 to step S518 is executed.

  If there is no next hold memory, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a change effect is determined for any of the hold memories (S521). If the change effect is determined for any one of the stored memories (YES in S521), the change effect effect is not executed, and thus the process of determining the change effect effect in step S524 is not executed. Is returned to the prefetch notice setting process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, if no change effect has been determined for any pending storage (NO in S521), the process from step S522 to step S526 is executed to determine whether or not to execute the change effect effect. To do.

  First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an on-hold storage that has already changed to red (S522). If it is determined that there is a pending storage that has already changed to red (YES in S522), the process for determining the change gaze effect in step S524 is not executed, and the process to be executed is referred to as the prefetch notice setting process of the caller of this process Return to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by executing a change gaze effect with a low degree of expectation even though there is a red hold display with the highest degree of expectation that a big hit will occur. .

  When it is determined that there is no on-hold storage that has changed to red (NO in S522), the effect control CPU 101 refers to the character B gasset executed flag shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a pending storage that has been completed (S523). If it is determined that there is an on-hold storage in which the change gaze effect by the character B has been executed (YES in S523), the process for determining the change gaze effect in step S524 is not executed, and the process to be executed is called this process. Return to the original prefetch notice setting process.

  Thereby, although the change effect by the character B with high expectation is executed, the player is discouraged because the hold display color remains white and does not become blue or red. In spite of this, for the same hold display, the change effect by the character A having a lower expectation than the change effect by the character B is executed, which is a gas effect, the color of the hold display remains white and blue or red In addition, the player can be further discouraged from being discouraged.

  When it is determined that there is no on-hold storage in which the change gaze effect by the character B has been executed (NO in S523), the effect control CPU 101 changes based on the change gaze effect determination table (character A, character B). ) Is determined (S524). Information that can identify the determined change gaze effect is stored in the RAM 103. In step S503 of FIG. 21 described above, an effect control pattern for executing a change gasset effect is determined based on this storage, and in step S506, the change gasset effect is executed based on the effect control pattern.

  Referring to FIG. 23 (B), the change gaze effect determination table determines whether a specific mode of change gaze effect (either character A or character B executes the change gaze effect, depending on the number of reserved memories, The distribution of random values of the random counter for determining the change effect for the manner in which the change gas effect is not executed is defined. In the process for determining the change effect effect such as S524, a random value for change effect determination is extracted, and the change effect effect corresponding to the extracted value is selected and determined using the change effect effect determination table.

  In the change gusset effect determination table, the distribution is determined such that the greater the number of reserved memories, the higher the ratio at which the change gusset effect is determined to be executed relative to the ratio at which the change gusset effect is determined not to be executed. . On the other hand, as the number of reserved memories increases, the allocation is determined so that the ratio at which the change gaze effect is determined to be executed is lower than the ratio at which the change gase effect is determined not to be executed. Also good.

  Moreover, in the change gasse effect determination table, the expectation that the hold display changes is higher when the effect by the character B is executed than when the effect by the character A is executed, regardless of the number of reserved memories. As described above, the distribution is determined. That is, when determining the change gaze effect, the distribution is determined so that the ratio at which the change A effect is determined by the character A with respect to the ratio at which the change G effect by the character B is determined is high.

  Further, in the change gaze effect determination table, the hold display is more expected when the change effect by the character B is executed than when the change effect by the character A is executed, regardless of the number of reserved memories. The distribution is determined so that the degree of expectation for changing to the aspect (red) is high. That is, when determining the change gaze effect, the distribution is determined so that the ratio at which the change gase effect is determined not to be executed with respect to the ratio at which the character A or character B is determined to be changed is increased.

  The correspondence relationship between the change gaze effect mode and the expectation may be another relationship. For example, when the effect by the character A is executed, the degree of expectation that the hold display changes is lower than when the effect by the character B is executed, but when the effect by the character B is executed, the character A The distribution may be determined so that the degree of expectation that changes to a mode with a high degree of expectation (red) is lower than when the effect is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 22, after step S <b> 524, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the change gaze effect by the character B is determined in step S <b> 524 (S <b> 525). When it is determined that the change gaze effect by the character B has not been determined (NO in S525), the effect control CPU 101 returns the process to be executed to the prefetch notice setting process of the calling source of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the change gaze effect by the character B is determined (YES in S525), the effect control CPU 101 stores all the hold memories currently stored in the effect side hold storage buffer shown in FIG. The corresponding character B gasase execution completion flag is stored so as to indicate execution completion (S526). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 returns the process to be executed to the prefetch notice setting process of the caller of this process.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), in the change gasse effect determination table, the mode of the hold display at the decision timing (for example, any hold display is white, blue, red) Depending on a certain aspect, a combination of white, blue, and red on-hold display or an arrangement order aspect, the probability of determining whether or not to execute the change gaze effect and whether or not to execute the change gaze effect is made different. In the second embodiment, in the change-gase effect determination table, the probability of determining the change-gase effect mode and the execution of the change-gase effect is varied depending on the hold display mode at the determination timing.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a change-gase effect determination table in the second embodiment. Referring to FIG. 25, the change gaze effect determination table is a specific example of the change gaze effect according to the number of reserved memories and the mode of hold display (in this embodiment, whether blue or red is included). The distribution of the random number of the random counter for determining the change effect for the mode (a mode in which either the character A or the character B executes the change gaze effect or not) is determined. In the process of determining the change effect effect as in S524 of FIG. 22, a random value for change effect determination is extracted, and the change effect effect corresponding to the extracted value is selected and determined using the change effect effect determination table. .

  In the change gaze effect determination table, if the number of reserved memories is the same, the change display mode is executed for the ratio at which it is determined that the change gaze effect is not executed if there is a change in the mode of the hold display. The distribution is determined so that the rate at which it is determined is high. On the other hand, if the number of stored storages is the same, it is determined that the one with a change in the display mode of the holding display will execute the changing gash effect for the ratio at which it is determined not to execute the changing gash effect. The distribution may be determined so that the ratio of the distribution is low.

  Also, in the change gaze effect determination table, if the hold display mode (the mode in which the hold display is only white, or the blue or red color in the hold display) is the same, the change gaze effect is executed as the number of reserved memory increases. The distribution is determined so that the ratio at which it is determined to execute the change gaze effect with respect to the ratio at which it is determined not to be performed becomes high. On the other hand, when the hold display mode is the same, the greater the number of hold memories, the lower the rate at which the change gaze effect is determined relative to the rate at which the change gaze effect is determined not to be executed. In addition, the distribution may be determined.

  Also, in the change gasse effect determination table, the hold display changes more when the effect by the character B is executed than when the effect by the character A is executed, regardless of the number of reserved memories and the mode of hold display. The distribution is determined so that the degree of expectation is high. That is, when determining the change gaze effect, the distribution is determined so that the ratio at which the change A effect is determined by the character A with respect to the ratio at which the change G effect by the character B is determined is high.

  Further, in the change gasse effect determination table, regardless of the number of reserved memories and the mode of hold display, when the change effect by the character B is executed, the hold display is more effective than when the change effect by the character A is executed. The distribution is determined such that the degree of expectation that changes to a more highly expected aspect (red) is high. That is, when determining the change gaze effect, the distribution is determined so that the ratio at which the change gase effect is determined not to be executed with respect to the ratio at which the character A or character B is determined to be changed is increased.

  The correspondence relationship between the change gaze effect mode and the expectation may be another relationship. For example, when the change gaze effect by the character A is executed, the expectation that the hold display changes is lower than when the change gaze effect by the character B is executed, but the change gaze effect by the character B is executed. In such a case, the distribution may be determined so that the degree of expectation for changing to a mode with a high degree of expectation (red) is lower than when the change gaze effect by character A is executed.

[effect]
Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.

(1) A start condition after a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area (for example, the game area 7). (For example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable state, and the big hit game is not executed) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol) that can be identified based on each are variably displayed, and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when
A range of a predetermined upper limit storage number (for example, 4 for each of the first and second special symbols) for variable display of identification information for which the start condition is not yet satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area A holding storage means (for example, first and second holding storage buffers in FIG. 7) that can be stored as holding information in
Hold display means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold storage display unit 18d) capable of holding display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage unit;
Predetermining means (for example, a game control micro) for determining, based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means, whether or not the display result of variable display is to be the specific display result when the start condition is satisfied. A computer 560, steps S61 and S71 in FIG. 12, and
When the game medium passes through the start area, a passage time determination means (for example, a game) for determining whether or not a variable display result based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result. A control microcomputer 560, step S220 in FIG. 11, and
Specific mode display means (for example, production) that can change the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the object of the determination to a specific mode (for example, blue or red) according to the determination by the passage time determination unit. The control microcomputer 100, the hold control is displayed in step S729 in FIG. 17, and the change effect or change gaze effect determined in step S518 and step S524 in FIG. 22 is started in step S506 in FIG. It is executed in the production of the pattern, and the hold memory is changed or cannot be changed.).

(1-1) In addition to the configuration of (1) described above, the gaming machine further includes:
As a specific effect (for example, a change effect by character A, B, a change gasset effect) regarding whether or not the hold display is the specific mode, a first specific effect (for example, a change effect by character A, a change gasset effect) and the relevant Specific effect means (for example, an effect control microcomputer) capable of executing a second specific effect (for example, a change effect or change effect by a character B) having a higher expectation that the hold display becomes the specific mode than the first specific effect. 100, the change effect and the change gaze effect determined in steps S518 and S524 in FIG. 22 are executed in the effect control pattern effect started in step S506 in FIG. 21, and the hold memory is changed or changed. I ca n’t make it happen.)
When the second specific effect is executed but the on-hold display is not in the specific mode (for example, when the change gaze effect is executed on the character B), the first specific effect is executed on the hold display. Specific effect restricting means for restricting the effect (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 and the change gass effect of character B are executed, in step S525 and step S526 in FIG. If the character B gasset execution flag in the buffer is stored to indicate that it has been executed, and it is determined in step S523 that character B gasset execution has been held, the process does not proceed to step S524, and a change gasset effect is produced. In addition, it is not limited to the fact that the change effect of characters A and B is not executed at all, If the execution of the change gaze effect is at least restricted, the change effect of the character A is not executed at all, or is executed with a low probability, and the change effect of the character A and the change effect of the character B, The change gaze effect may be restricted or may not be restricted at all.

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect with high expectation is executed, but the hold display is not in a specific mode, and the player is disappointed, but the same hold display is targeted. It is possible to prevent the player from being further discouraged by executing the first specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the second specific effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1-2) In addition to the configuration of (1) described above, the gaming machine further includes:
As a specific effect (for example, a change effect by the characters A and B, a change gasset effect) regarding whether or not the hold display is the specific mode, the first specific effect (for example, the change effect by the character A, the change gasset effect) and the first 2 Specific effect means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, the change effect determined in step S518 and step S524 in FIG. 22 and the change effect) The effect is executed with the effect of the effect control pattern started in step S506 of FIG. 21, and the hold memory is changed or cannot be changed.)
The specific aspect display means includes
The display result of the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the hold information that is the object of the determination by the passage time determination means is based on the first specific mode (for example, blue) and the hold information than the first specific mode. It is possible to set the second specific mode (for example, red) with high expectation (for example, see FIG. 19) as the specific display result (for example, see FIGS. 19 and 24),
After execution of the second specific effect, the hold display is set to the second specific mode at a higher rate than after execution of the first specific effect (for example, after execution of the change effect on character B, Compared with the execution of the change effect, the hold display is made red at a higher rate (see FIG. 19).
The gaming machine further includes:
When the second specific effect is executed but the on-hold display is not in the specific mode (for example, when the change gaze effect is executed on the character B), the first specific effect is executed on the hold display. Specific effect restricting means for restricting the effect (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 and the change gass effect of character B are executed, in step S525 and step S526 in FIG. If the character B gasset execution flag in the buffer is stored to indicate completion, and it is determined in step S523 that there is a pending storage of character B gasase execution, the process does not proceed to step S524, and the change gasset effect is determined. Note that the change of the character A is not limited to the fact that the change effect of the characters A and B is not executed at all. If the execution of the center effect is at least restricted, the change effect of the character A is not executed at all or is executed with a low probability, and the change effect of the character A and the change effect of the character B The gaze effect may be limited or may not be limited at all.

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect having a high ratio of the second specific aspect having a higher expectation level that is the specific display result than the first specific aspect is executed, but the hold display is changed to the second specific aspect. Instead, although the player is discouraged, for the same hold display, the first specific effect in which the hold display is in the second specific mode at a lower rate than after the execution of the second specific effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being executed and further discouraging the player. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1-3) In addition to the above-described configuration (1-1), the gaming machine further includes:
The specific effect means executes the specific effect at a different rate according to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means (see, for example, FIGS. 19 and 20).

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect with high expectation is executed, but the hold display is not in a specific mode, and the player is disappointed, but the same hold display is targeted. It is possible to prevent the player from being further discouraged by executing the first specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the second specific effect. Further, specific effects are executed at different rates depending on the number of stored hold information. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1-4) In addition to the configuration of (1-2) described above, the gaming machine further includes:
The specific effect means executes the specific effect at a different rate according to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means (see, for example, FIGS. 19 and 20).

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect having a high ratio of the second specific aspect having a higher expectation level that is the specific display result than the first specific aspect is executed, but the hold display is changed to the second specific aspect. Instead, although the player is discouraged, for the same hold display, the first specific effect in which the hold display is in the second specific mode at a lower rate than after the execution of the second specific effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being executed and further discouraging the player. Further, specific effects are executed at different rates depending on the number of stored hold information. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1-5) In addition to the above-described configuration (1-1), the gaming machine further includes:
The specific effect means executes the specific effect at a different rate according to the mode of the hold display by the hold display means (see, for example, FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect with high expectation is executed, but the hold display is not in a specific mode, and the player is disappointed, but the same hold display is targeted. It is possible to prevent the player from being further discouraged by executing the first specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the second specific effect. In addition, specific effects are executed at different rates depending on the mode of hold display. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1-6) In addition to the configuration of (1-2) described above, the gaming machine further includes:
The specific effect means executes the specific effect at a different rate according to the mode of the hold display by the hold display means (see, for example, FIGS. 19 and 25).

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect having a high ratio of the second specific aspect having a higher expectation level that is the specific display result than the first specific aspect is executed, but the hold display is changed to the second specific aspect. Instead, although the player is discouraged, for the same hold display, the first specific effect in which the hold display is in the second specific mode at a lower rate than after the execution of the second specific effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being executed and further discouraging the player. In addition, specific effects are executed at different rates depending on the mode of hold display. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1-7) In addition to the configuration of (1-1) described above, the gaming machine further includes:
The specific mode display means is a mode of the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, a change effect or a change gusset effect. Specifically, it acts on the hold display or passes without acting on the hold display). Depending on the situation, the hold display is changed to the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 23, when the hold display is changed to blue or red, a change effect by characters A and B is executed 100%. In the case where the hold display is not changed to blue or red, there is a case where a change effect by characters A and B is executed or a change effect is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect with high expectation is executed, but the hold display is not in a specific mode, and the player is disappointed, but the same hold display is targeted. It is possible to prevent the player from being further discouraged by executing the first specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the second specific effect. In addition, the hold display is set to the specific mode at a different rate depending on the mode of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1-8) In addition to the configuration of (1-2) described above, the gaming machine further includes:
The specific mode display means is a mode of the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, a change effect or a change gusset effect. Specifically, it acts on the hold display or passes without acting on the hold display). Depending on the situation, the on-hold display is changed to the second specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 23, when the on-hold display is changed to red, 100%, a change effect by characters A and B is executed. If the hold display is not changed to red, the change effect is executed and the hold display is changed to blue, the change gaze effect by the characters A and B is executed, or the change effect is not executed) .

  According to such a configuration, the second specific effect having a high ratio of the second specific aspect having a higher expectation level that is the specific display result than the first specific aspect is executed, but the hold display is changed to the second specific aspect. Instead, although the player is discouraged, for the same hold display, the first specific effect in which the hold display is in the second specific mode at a lower rate than after the execution of the second specific effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being executed and further discouraging the player. In addition, the hold display is changed to the second specific mode at a different rate depending on the mode of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(2) In any of the gaming machines (1-1) to (1-8) above,
The specific effect means executes the specific effect during variable display prior to variable display based on hold information corresponding to the hold display related to the specific effect (for example, determined in steps S518 and S524 in FIG. 22). The change effect and the change effect are executed with the effect control pattern effect started in step S506 of Fig. 21. Thus, when the hold display is being made, the change effect or the change effect is made with respect to the hold display. Production is performed.)

  According to such a structure, the interest of the game during the variable display of identification information can be improved.

(3-1) In any one of the above gaming machines (1-1), (1-3), (1-5), (1-7) and (2),
The specific mode display means may change the hold display corresponding to the hold information subjected to the determination by the passage time determination means from a predetermined mode (for example, white) to a first specific mode (for example, blue). The second specific mode that is possible and has a high expectation that the display result of the variable display based on the hold information becomes the specific display result from the first specific mode than the first specific mode (for example, see FIG. 19). (For example, refer to FIG. 19 and FIG. 24).

  According to such a configuration, the expectation can be increased step by step. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(3-2) In any of the above gaming machines (1-2), (1-4), (1-6), (1-8) and (2),
The specific mode display means changes the hold display corresponding to the hold information subjected to the determination by the passage time determination means from a predetermined mode (for example, white) to the first specific mode (for example, blue). It is possible to change from the first specific mode to the second specific mode (for example, red) (for example, see FIGS. 19 and 24).

  According to such a configuration, the expectation can be increased step by step. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1-1) to (1-8), (2), (3-1), and (3-2),
The specific mode display means displays the hold display through the specific effect at a different ratio between when the determination result that the specific display result is obtained is obtained by the passage time determination unit and when the determination result is not obtained. Or a process for setting the hold display to the specific mode without passing through the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the ratio of the case where it is not changed and the case where it is changed in the middle is different.)

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1-1) to (1-8), (2), (3-1), (3-2), and (4),
When a game medium passes through the start area, whether or not to put the hold display corresponding to the hold information generated by the passage of the game medium into the specific mode, and before the variable display based on the hold information is started The holding effect determining means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, step S726 in FIG. 17, step S727) is further provided for determining at which timing the specific effect is to be executed and the type of the specific effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load other than when the starting area is passed.

[Modifications and features]
Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) In the above embodiment, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as an effect to be executed in the variable display. The pseudo-continuous is a pseudo-continuous variation that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of variations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is originally a variation corresponding to one reserved memory. Is an abbreviation for

  (2) In the said embodiment, you may make it perform a slip effect as an effect performed in a variable display. Slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous, 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (5) The above-described embodiment is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a prize ball, and the game balls are enclosed as follows. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives points in response to detection. Specifically, in the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the game ball (which may be a rental ball) that the player has paid out is launched into the game area. Although it was a gaming machine to be performed, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values of the size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card In addition, the present invention is also applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using the given game score or the game score given by winning a game. Can be applied. In other words, after the game medium (game ball) passes through the start area, based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner and a display result is derived. A game machine that includes a variable display device for displaying, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, the game machine shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to a player. A game ball encapsulated in the gaming machine is used to play the game area, and the game score is subtracted in response to the game ball being driven, and the game ball wins the winning area provided in the game area. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds game scores accordingly. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  (6) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a detachable recording medium, but may be stored in advance in a storage device such as a computer device or the like. You may take the form distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (7) In the variation pattern setting process, the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is set differently when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be varied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and less than the predetermined number. By selecting a variation pattern using the variation pattern table, the number of reserved memories of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number when the number of reserved symbols of each special symbol that displays variation is a predetermined number (for example, 2) or more. As compared with the case of the above, it is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control in which the variation time is shortened. For example, a first variation pattern table used when the number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number and a second variation pattern table used when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more are provided. The data is set so that the average value of the variation times of the variation patterns selected is shorter than that of the first variation pattern table. Then, when selecting the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, it is checked whether or not the number of reserved memories of each special symbol is equal to or larger than a predetermined number. If the number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number, the first variation When the variation pattern is determined using the pattern table and the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, the variation pattern may be determined using the second variation pattern table. If such a hold number reduction control is performed, the hold storage information can be digested at an early stage, and generation of useless start winnings can be suppressed, and a big hit gaming state can be generated at an early stage. In addition, such a hold number shortening control calculates the sum hold memory number which added the hold memory information number of the 1st special symbol, and the hold memory information number of the 2nd special symbol, and the said sum hold memory number is specified. You may make it perform on condition that it is more than a number (for example, 3).

  When such hold number reduction control is executed, for example, whether or not the hold number reduction control is executed in order to ensure the consistency between the pre-reading notice and the change display at the time of actual change display. Regardless of the variation pattern table, a specific variation pattern such as a reach variation pattern is determined so that the same variation pattern is determined based on random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) and random 3 (variation pattern determination random number). Data may be set and control may be performed so that the prefetch notice can be executed for the specific variation pattern. As a variation pattern prefetching command, if a variation pattern type is prefetched without specifying a detailed variation pattern, and a variation pattern type prefetch designation command for designating the prefetched variation pattern type is transmitted, the reach variation pattern For a specific variation pattern such as the above, the variation pattern table data is set so that the same variation pattern type is determined based on random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) without using random 3 as described above. The control may be performed so that the pre-reading notice can be executed for the specific variation pattern.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the variation pattern type determination table used when there is a deviation, the determination value of the random value (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type of non-reach deviation that has the shortest variation time. In the case of performing the hold number reduction control, when the hold number is small (for example, 0 to 2), the determination value is set to 0 to 99 for the variation pattern type of non-reach deviation. When the number of holdings is large (for example, 3 and 4), the determination value is set to 0 to 150 for the non-reach deviation variation pattern type, and the determination value for the variation pattern type of super reach is determined according to the number of stored storages. Do not change. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the digestion of the reserved memory by the non-reach deviation variation display with the shortest variation time. In addition, since the hold storage determined to be super reach at the time of starting winning is determined to be super reach even at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to eliminate the influence on the pre-reading effect related to super reach.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the first specific effect and the second specific effect with a high expectation in which the hold display is in a specific mode than the first specific effect are different in the character A and the character having different shapes, respectively. It was decided to be a production by B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be different effects. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 26, the same character A (character 95A in the figure) may have different appearance positions or different character sizes. Further, the effects may be different in appearance timing, manner of operation, moving direction, number of characters, sound effects, lighting mode of the effect lamp, and the like. In this case, the effect by the character A (first specific effect) and the effect by the character B (second specific effect) are different in appearance timing, manner of operation, number of characters, sound effect, and light emission of the effect lamp 2 respectively. It corresponds to one production.

  Then, if the hold display is changed to a specific mode (blue, red) at a different rate depending on the mode of the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the effect is performed by the character A as in the above-described embodiment. The display is not limited to the specific mode of the hold display at a different rate depending on whether the character B is an effect, for example, depending on whether the appearance timing of the character is late or early, Depending on whether the method is fast or slow, depending on whether the number of characters is large or small, and whether the sound effect is a normal sound effect or a different sound effect The lighting mode of the effect lamp may be a normal pattern or a different pattern from the normal pattern.

  In addition, it is highly expected that the hold display is a specific display result (a jackpot display result) from the first specific aspect (blue) or the first specific aspect at a different rate depending on the aspect of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. If two specific modes (red) are selected, the hold display is displayed in the first specific mode at a different rate according to the mode of the effect by the character A or the character B as in the embodiment described above. To the second specific mode, for example, depending on whether the appearance timing of the character is late or early, or depending on whether the manner of movement is fast or slow, Depending on whether the number of characters is large or small, it may depend on whether the sound effect is a normal sound effect or a sound effect different from the normal sound, and the lighting mode of the effect lamp is a normal pattern Or what is normal Or in accordance with the pattern of the aspects comprising.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the character A is the character 95 shown in FIG. 24, and the character B is a character having a shape different from that of the character A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 27, the character B may be a character 95B having the same shape as the character 95 but having a different pattern or color (for example, a hair pattern or color).

  (10) FIG. 26 shows a case where the first and third hold displays are the white mode hold display 18cA and the second hold display is the color mode hold display 18cB among the plurality of hold displays. In FIG. 27, all of the on-hold display of the first on-hold storage display unit 18c is the white mode on-hold display 18cA, and among the on-hold display on the second on-hold storage display unit 18d, the first on-hold display is the white mode on-hold display. It shows 18 dB, and the case where the second hold display is the colored state hold display 18 dB is shown.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, there are two special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the reserved memory for the second special symbol is preferentially digested. Also, in the high base state and the big hit game state, the pre-reading notice effect for the reserved memory of the first special symbol is not executed, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed only for the reserved memory of the second special symbol. I made it. Then, as the pre-reading notice effect, the change effect and the change gaze effect are executed on the hold display of the first hold memory display unit 18c and the second hold memory display unit 18d for the two special symbols.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change effect and the change gaze effect may be executed only on the first reserved storage display unit 18c of the first special symbol. In this case, if there is a start winning of the second special symbol by the change timing determined at the time of starting winning, the change timing may be shifted until the start winning of the next first special symbol. In such a case, the change effect and the change effect may be stopped.

  Further, the change effect and the change gaze effect may be executed only for the second reserved storage display unit 18d of the second special symbol. Alternatively, for a gaming machine in which two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are not provided and one type of special symbol is variably displayed based on the start winning prize, The described change effect and change gasset effect may be applied.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, the reserved memory for the second special symbol is preferentially digested (hereinafter referred to as “preferential digestion”). Specifically, as shown in steps S52 to S54 in FIG. 12, if there is a reserved storage for the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be digested in the winning order (hereinafter referred to as “winning order digest”). In other words, the stored memory for the start winning to the first starting port or the second starting port is stored in the order of winning, and the variable display for the stored storing is executed in the order of winning. Specifically, the hold storage buffer shown in FIG. 7 is changed to store a predetermined number (for example, eight) without distinction between the first start prize and the second start prize, and from step S52 to step S54 in FIG. The process determines whether the first reserved memory is the reserved memory of the first starting port or the reserved memory of the second starting port. Data indicating “1” is set, and data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer if the second starting port is stored on hold.

  In the case of the winning order digestion, the two production side holding storage buffers shown in FIG. 18 are combined into one production side holding storage buffer. At the time of starting winning a prize, in the case of preferential digestion, the processing of FIG. 17 is performed independently in the case of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is executed without distinction between the case of the symbol and the second special symbol.

  At the start of fluctuation, in the case of priority digestion, as shown in FIG. 22A, the detailed setting process of FIG. 22B is executed independently in the case of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in the case of winning order digestion, the detailed setting process of FIG. 22B is executed without distinction between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 22, when the change gusset effect of character B is executed, the change gusset effect of characters A and B is not executed at all. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other methods may be used as long as the execution of the change gaze effect of the character A is at least restricted when the change gaze effect of the character B is executed. For example, the change gaze effect of the character A is limited (not executed at all or executed with a low probability), and an effect other than the change gaze effect of the character A (the change effect of the character A and the character B) (Change effect, change effect) may be limited, or may not be limited at all.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when the character acts on the hold display, the hold display always changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the character acts on the hold display, the hold display may not change.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, the character displayed on the effect display device 9 acts on the hold display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a real movable object may act on the hold display.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, when the effect by the character B (second specific effect) is executed, but the reserved display does not become a specific mode, the effect by the character A (first specified) for the reserved display. Execution is restricted by preventing execution. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution may be limited by lowering the execution frequency of the first specific effect for the hold display.

  (17) In the embodiment described above, the execution of the first specific effect is restricted by preventing the effect (first change effect) by the character A from being executed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the first specific effect may be restricted by preventing not only the gaze effect of the first specific effect but also the true effect (change effect) from being executed. Here, among the specific effects related to whether or not the hold display is in the specific mode, the effect that is in the specific mode is the true effect, and the effect that is not in the specific mode is the gaze effect. For example, if step S518 in FIG. 22 is changed and there is a reserved storage for performing character B gasses, it is determined whether or not to execute a change effect by character B, while character B gasses have been performed. If there is no on-hold storage, it is determined whether or not to execute a change effect by the character A or the character B.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the execution of the first specific effect is limited by preventing the first specific effect and the second specific effect from being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the first specific effect may be limited by preventing the specific effect from being executed regardless of the gaze effect and the true effect.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19, whether or not to execute the change effect (true specific effect) is determined at the time of starting winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a change effect or a change gasse effect (true or a specific effect of gasse) is determined at the time of start winning, whether the specific effect is true or not The type may be determined at the start of fluctuation.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in step S727 in FIG. 17, the change timing is determined at the time of starting winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change timing may not be determined at the time of starting winning. For example, regarding the change timing, whether or not to change this time may be selected at each start of the change display until the change display corresponding to the target hold display is executed. Specifically, with respect to the hold display for which the change effect is determined to be executed, a random number is extracted to determine whether or not to change this time at the start of the variable display, and the random number value matches a predetermined determination value. If it matches, the change effect is executed for the hold display, and if it does not match, the change effect is not executed. If the change effect is not yet executed when the hold display becomes the first hold display, the change effect is executed. Further, when the change timing is not determined at the time of the start winning prize, whether or not to execute the change effect and the change pattern may be determined at the time of the start winning prize, or not determined at the start winning prize, for example, the fluctuation It may be determined at the start of display.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not to execute the change effect (specific effect) and the timing to execute the change effect (specific effect) are determined at the start winning prize, and the change effect and change gasses are determined. The type of production (specific production) is determined immediately before the start of fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of the specific effect may be determined at the time of starting winning as well as whether or not to execute the specific effect and the timing of executing the specific effect.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, when the effect by the character B (second specific effect) is executed, but the on-hold display is not in the specific mode, the character B gase executed flag for all the on-hold storage at that time Is set to “executed” and, as shown in step S523 of FIG. 22, when there is a pending storage that has been executed, in step S524, the character A changes gaze effect (gase effect of the first specific effect) and the character The execution of the first specific effect is restricted by preventing the change gasse effect by B (gase effect of the second specific effect) from being executed.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the second specific effect is executed but the on-hold display is not in a specific mode, the first specific effect gasses effect and the second specific effect gasses effect until four reserved memories are consumed. May not be executed. In addition, the true effect of the first specific effect may not be executed. In addition, the second specific effect may be executed even in the case of the gasse effect.

  In addition, when the second specific effect is executed but the on-hold display is not in the specific mode, the timing for determining the true effect of the first specific effect is waited. The execution of the first specific effect may be restricted by forcibly rewriting the true effect.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23A, when changing the hold display, the specific effect by the character A or the character B is always executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the specific effect is not executed may be included when the hold display is changed.

  Even in this case, as in the case of FIG. 23A, in the change effect determination table, when the change effect by the character B is executed, than when the change effect by the character A is executed, It is desirable that the distribution be determined so that the degree of expectation that the hold display changes to a higher expectation mode (red) is increased. That is, the distribution is determined so that the ratio of the change effect by the character B to the ratio of the change effect by the character A is higher in the case of the red change than in the case of the blue change. It is desirable.

  (24) In the embodiment described above, the change pattern is determined at the same rate in the change pattern determination table of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change pattern may be determined at a different rate for each number of reserved memories.

  (25) The specific effect may be any effect as long as it is an effect related to whether or not the hold display is in a specific mode. It may be an effect only when the on-hold display appears, or an effect on the way from when the on-hold display appears until it is digested. In short, any effect may be used as long as the on-hold display changes. In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is an effect by display, but it may be an effect by sound or light.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the specific effect for the proportion in which the specific effect is not executed is determined in the case where it is determined to be the big hit, than in the case where it is not determined. The distribution is set so that the rate of executing is increased. However, the distribution is not limited to this, and the distribution may be determined so as to be low.

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the specific effect is executed at a different rate depending on the mode of the hold display. Specifically, the mode of the hold display is a mode in which the hold display is only white and a mode in which the hold display has blue or red. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the pending display is whether or not the pending display has changed, the number of the pending display that has changed, the mode of the pending display change, or a combination thereof. Also good.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 25, the distribution is made different depending on whether or not a big hit is made. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit. For example, in the case of a big hit, the distribution may be determined so that the ratio of executing the change effect to the ratio in which the change effect is not executed is higher than in the case of not making the big hit. Further, in the case of a big hit, the distribution may be determined so that the rate at which the change effect is executed relative to the rate at which the change effect is not executed is lower than in the case where the big win is not set.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, until the high probability state and the high base state are displayed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol and the effect symbol change display is performed, or the next time a big hit occurs. Until now, whichever comes first. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may continue until the next big hit occurs.

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in step S522 and step S524 in FIG. 22, when there is no pending storage that has already changed to red, the change gaze effect is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of step S522 may be omitted. In addition, when there is no reserved memory that is determined to change to red, the ratio for determining the change gaze effect may be improved. In addition, when there is a pending storage that has been determined to change to red, the ratio for determining the change gaze effect may be improved. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player that the change aspect with high expectation is included.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in step S523 and step S524 in FIG. 22, if there is at least one pending display for which the character B gas has been executed, the change gas effect is not determined. As a result, in the above-described embodiment, it is not possible to specify which hold display is applied to the change display effect.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a change gaze effect may be determined and executed for a display other than the on-hold display that has already been executed. In this case, information that can specify for which holding storage the change gaze effect by the character B is determined and executed is stored, and the holding storage in which the change gaze effect by the character B is not determined and executed by the information. In response to this, it is determined whether or not to execute the change gaze effect. Then, the change effect is executed in such a manner that it can be specified which hold display is to be applied.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, when the change timings of the change effects overlap, the overlapped change effects may be executed in order, or based on the effect control pattern for the case where the change timings overlap. An effect that changes a plurality of hold displays to be changed may be executed. Moreover, you may make it perform the overlapping change production simultaneously.

  (33) The timing for changing the hold display after the start of the change may be determined, and the specific effect may be generated at the determined timing. In this case, the change timing is determined according to the variation pattern. For example, a time within the fluctuation time range of the fluctuation pattern may be determined as the change timing.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in step S523 and step S524 in FIG. 22, a red color with a high degree of expectation that is a jackpot display result (specific display result) than blue (first specific mode) ( When an effect (second specific effect) by the character B having a high ratio of the second specific mode is executed but the hold display does not turn red, the hold display is consumed until the hold display is digested. As a target, both the change gusset effect (first specific effect) by the character A and the change gusset effect (second specific effect) by the character B are not executed.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second specific effect having a high ratio of the second specific aspect having a higher expectation level that is the specific display result than the first specific aspect is executed, but the hold display is the second specific aspect. Other methods may be used as long as the execution of the first specific effect is restricted for the hold display. When not only becoming the second specific mode but also not the first specific mode, the first specific effect may be limited for the hold display.

  Moreover, when it becomes the 1st specific aspect, even if it does not become a 2nd specific aspect, conversely, you may make it not restrict | limit the 1st specific production for the said pending | holding display.

  (35) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  For the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it has been described that the process (S29 in FIG. 8) of outputting information (data) related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in S29 may include a winning information signal that can identify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls (game balls).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a plurality of types of winning openings such as a first starting winning opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14, and a large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) are provided. Then, the winning of the game balls in these winning holes is detected by a winning detection switch such as the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23, and the detection signal is a microcomputer for game control. 560 is input.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, processing for counting and storing the number of game balls (winning number) won in each winning port during a predetermined period based on the detection signal input from the winning detection switch. It is possible, and by performing such processing, winning information that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won during a predetermined period is stored. The game control microcomputer 560, based on such winning information, receives a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points that the game ball has won in each predetermined period each time a predetermined period elapses. Is output from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The number of winnings specified by the winning information signal that can be counted and stored in the game control microcomputer 560 and the winning mouth and the winning number that the game ball won can be specified is, for example, every predetermined elapsed time such as every 10 minutes. Information on the number of winnings (output every predetermined elapsed time), information on the number of winnings for each period required to generate one big hit gaming state (output every time a big winning gaming state occurs), each day Information regarding the number of winnings since the power was turned on (output every predetermined elapsed time), and information regarding the number of winnings for each player (when the player can be specified by player specifying information such as game card information) In addition, any information may be output when the end of the game is selected by each player.

  In addition, as the winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won, the winning opening and the winning number (one piece) that are output every time the gaming ball wins any of the winning holes, and May be a winning information signal that can identify the

  Further, as another example of outputting the winning information signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to perform an operation test on a part of the output terminals of the main board 31 with a test device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. These connection parts may be connected, and a winning information signal indicating the latest winning information in the current gaming state may be output from the gaming control microcomputer 560 to the outside via the connecting portion.

  In this way, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points of the game balls is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the winning opening where the gaming balls have won outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. It is possible to recognize winning information that can specify the number of winnings.

[Third Embodiment]
As a third embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having a game control as an example of the game control, such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first and second embodiments, is an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine). ) And an example of a system for managing the pachinko machine and the card unit will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the following third embodiment are applied to either the gaming machine or the card unit described as the first or second embodiment. Also good.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and includes a first control means and a second control means that communicate with each other, It relates to a game board and a game frame.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, it includes a first control means communicably connected to an authentication information management apparatus and a second control means communicably connected to the first control means, and the first control means and the second control A means is disclosed as a pair authentication information, and a second control means is disclosed as a gaming machine in which one of the pair authentication information is stored in advance (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-1000076).

  Conventionally, for example, there is one that performs transmission / reception of ciphertexts using a common key cryptosystem between a main CPU that controls the gaming state of a gaming machine and a sub-CPU that controls, for example, a variable display device (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-124) -89701).

  In the gaming machine, when the first control means and the second control means communicate with each other, there is a possibility that the communication between the two control means is interrupted and the communication between the two becomes impossible. Assuming such a situation, it is necessary to predetermine a return procedure after communication between the two becomes impossible. In this case, if the predetermined information that has been generated on the one hand and is scheduled to be transmitted to the other side has not reached the other side, a return process in which the predetermined information is transmitted to the other side must be determined upon return.

  However, if such a return process is included in the user program executed by the control means, the control burden on the control means executing the user program increases.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to reduce the control burden related to the return processing after the communication between the first control means and the second control means becomes impossible. That is.

(1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control part 161F) and second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 53, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 54, etc.);
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600F, 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the return process On the condition (SF 292 in FIG. 56: a flag indicating the completion of recovery is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program is performed. Restart (SF293 in FIG. 56: send a signal for starting the processing of the user program, or cancel the processing of the user program that has been stopped by the stopping means and restart the processing of the user program).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(2) In (1) above,
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the processing is appropriately restarted in both the first control unit and the second control unit. be able to.

(3) In the above (1) or (2),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).
When transmitting the predetermined information, the communication control circuit also transmits arrival confirmation information that is updated according to a predetermined update pattern in order to confirm the arrival of the predetermined information (FIG. 59: to the payout control unit 171F). Send the power-on notification command including the serial number sent last time (main control serial number = n + 1)),
The communication control circuit of one of the first control means and the second control means resends the arrival confirmation information transmitted last time when returning from the communication disabled state (FIG. 59: power supply for power-on notification command). Send response of input / output)
The first control means or the second control means including the other communication control circuit includes the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before communication is disabled. Is not based on the predetermined information (FIG. 59: main control sequence number = n + 1 and payout control sequence number = n do not match) based on the predetermined information transmitted by the one communication control circuit by the return processing. Information update processing (FIG. 59: recovery processing is executed) is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before the communication is disabled are not in a predetermined relationship, one communication control is performed by the return process. Since the information updating process based on the predetermined information transmitted by the circuit is executed, the communication burden between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(4) In the above (1) to (3),
The information storage unit includes a nonvolatile storage area (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 53, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 54) and a volatile storage area (for example, a register other than the transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 53). And a register other than the data reception register 713F shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, since the information storage unit has the nonvolatile storage area and the volatile storage area, it is possible to suppress the amount of data required in the recovery process when communication is resumed.

(5) In the above (1) to (4),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 54: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(6) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 53) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 600F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined manner (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 161bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. On the condition (SF292 in FIG. 56: a flag indicating completion of recovery is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F), the generation of the predetermined information by executing the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 56: user program). A signal for starting the above process is transmitted, or the process of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the process of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(7) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control part 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). ,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 54) that stores the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. On the condition (SF292 in FIG. 56: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by execution of the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 56: user A signal for starting the program processing is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the processing of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control unit 161F) and second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 53, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 54, etc.);
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF);
Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is a decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 161bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit and transmits the information transmitted by the other decryption unit. Since the information is decrypted, the processing of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the contents of the encrypted information can be prevented from leaking and the security from being lowered. it can.

(8-2) In the above (8-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the encrypted communication process is performed in both the first control unit and the second control unit. In addition to mitigation, it is possible to prevent the content of encrypted information from leaking and reducing security.

(8-3) In the above (8-1) or (8-2),
The communication control circuit generates an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when power is turned on (for example, an encryption key and a decryption key are generated by an authentication sequence performed when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 56); A process of performing cryptographic communication using the encryption key and decryption key generated by the process is executed (after the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 56, encrypted communication is possible using the generated encryption key and decryption key).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit executes a process of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on, and a process of performing encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process Therefore, it is possible to reduce the encryption communication process performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, and to appropriately restart the process in at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit. .

(8-4) In the above (8-1) to (8-3),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 54: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(8-5) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 53) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF);
The second control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-6) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 54) that stores the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF);
The first control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(9-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and the gaming machine is communicatively connected, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 31: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 37). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 38: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a status information response command including information on counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the gaming points to the holding points (FIG. 38: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 28: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 38: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 38: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 38: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player to play a game in the gaming machine. A gaming device (CU3F) that enables
Count processing means for counting the gaming points based on the counting request from the gaming machine (FIG. 38: When the CU3F receives a status information response including information of counting request = ON, the counting ball requested And add the number to the number of balls.)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 28: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 38: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 38: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 38: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) The P table 2F is notified of information indicating that the state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming device (CU3F) that enables a game using a valuable value possessed by the player so as to be able to communicate, and a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs ( P stand 2F)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 31: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 37). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 38: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a status information response command including information on counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
When the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are processed in a manner that can be specified by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, the recording medium is awaiting removal. (FIG. 38: When the card P 2F is ready for card removal, the CU 3F notifies the card return preparation state OFF and card removal waiting ON information from the CU 3F. Receive.)

  According to the above configuration, since the game device receives a notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in a removal waiting state, the game machine prompts the player to remove the recording medium. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-4) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming device includes notification means (for example, a display 312F shown in FIG. 28) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-5) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278F shown in FIG. 28) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed based on the notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify the gaming machine that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented.

(9-6) In the above (9-1) or (9-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming device or a device connected to the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on P units) that the recording medium is waiting to be removed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium by notifying a device other than the gaming machine or gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

(9-7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 28: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, a game hall specifying information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the gaming device is installed (FIG. 34). When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325F to the P unit 2F.
The gaming machine is
Game hall identification information storage means (FIG. 34: P stand 2F stores “store code” included in the insertion notification command) for storing the game hall identification information notified by the game hall identification information notification means. ,
The game room specifying information newly notified by the game hall specifying information notifying means when the communication is restored after recovering from the communication incapable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate, and the game hall specifying When a recovery request including a “store code” is transmitted from the CU 3F to the game hall specifying information comparing means to be compared with the game hall specifying information stored in the information storage means, the “store code” ”And the stored“ store code ”are determined to match.)
Game prohibition means for prohibiting continuation of the game when the game hall identification information is determined to be inconsistent by the game hall identification information comparison means (P store 2F stores “store code” from CU3F. If the store code does not match, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  According to the above configuration, if the newly notified game hall specifying information and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the store is moved in the stored state.

(9-8) In the above (9-7),
The gaming device is:
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, security board 325F shown in FIG. 29) included in the gaming device when the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means and when the communication is restored. Device specific information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of specific information (SC board ID) (FIG. 34: When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F receives the “SC board ID” added by the security board 325F. And a card insertion notification command including:
The gaming machine is
Device identification information storage means for storing the device identification information notified by the device identification information notification means (FIG. 34: P base 2F stores “SC board ID” included in the insertion notification command);
When the communication is recovered, the device specifying information comparing unit (P 2F) compares the device specifying information newly notified by the device specifying information notifying unit with the device specifying information stored in the device specifying information storing unit. Further compares “SC board ID” from CU3F with the stored “SC board ID”),
The game prohibiting means prohibits continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information is inconsistent (in the case of mismatch, prohibiting continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly notified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the game is prohibited from being continued, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. Unauthorized movement of the gaming machine in the state can be prevented.

(9-9) In the above (9-7) or (9-8) above,
The gaming machine is
A game hall identification information reading means for reading the game hall identification information added to the game medium used for the game (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passage path of the P stand 2F, and the sensor is provided in the game ball. Read certain identification information (such as surface markings).
The game hall specifying information comparing means includes the game hall specifying information added to the game medium read by the game hall specifying information reading means, and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means. Compare (by the read identification information, it is determined whether or not it matches the identification information of the game ball of the own store. To do.)

  According to the above configuration, if the game hall identification information added to the game medium read by the game hall identification information reading means and the game hall identification information stored in the game hall identification information storage means do not match, the game medium It is possible to notify that game balls from other stores are mixed.

  Hereinafter, a third embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball (game ball) as an example of a game medium inside, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F to drive the launch motor 18F (see FIG. 29) and enclose it. Each ball is shot one by one into the game area 27F on the front of the game board 26F so that a game can be played. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  A keyhole 10F is provided above the hitting operation handle 25F, and a front key 5F (see FIG. 29) is inserted and a front frame 5F (see FIG. 29) is unlocked (for example, clockwise rotation) to insert the key. The frame 5F is opened, and the glass door 6F is opened by an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation) of the glass door (front member) 6F.

  The P stand 2F shown in FIG. 28 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided in the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 28, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 154F are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path (not shown) in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  An indicator 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display 54F is composed of a liquid crystal display device. In addition, the display 54F is formed integrally with the CU 3F and is fitted to the front surface of the P base 2F even when the display 54F is attached to the P base (pachinko machine) 2F independently of the CU (card unit) 3F as shown in FIG. It is also possible to use a configuration that combines them. If the display unit 54F of the CU3F is fitted to the front surface of the P base 2F, the CU3F and the P base 2F can be more strongly connected, and thus fraud can be further prevented.

  A 7-segment display 50F is provided below the display 54F. The 7-segment display 50F includes a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The 7-segment display 50F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like.

  Further, a counting button 28F for counting from game balls to holding balls is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25F on the P platform 2F. As will be described in detail later, when the count button 28F is pressed once, for example, 100 balls are counted from the game ball to the holding ball, and when pressed for a long period of time (long press), the game ball currently held is considered. Then, the number of game balls is counted from the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls pressed.

  Thus, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P base side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P base can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU side.

  A game ball number display 29F for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28F. The game ball number display 29F is a 7 segment type display. The game ball number display 29F may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 2F is a game machine that performs game control like the pachinko machine 1 described above as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and the basic game control and effect control are performed by the pachinko machine 2F. Controls similar to those of the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, and probability change control based on hold storage information) are performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3F is a visitor card (hereinafter also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that accepts these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the card balance, the number of possessions, the number of accumulated balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining fireable shots. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305F formed to project forward from the front of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305F described above, on the surface facing the player, the display device 312F, the membership card ID recorded on the membership card (hereinafter also simply referred to as the card ID) and the member when the membership card is received. An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit 320F receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319F for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the card ID, and a remote control (not shown) possessed by a game attendant. Thus, an IR light receiving unit that converts the electronic signal into an output is provided.

  The display 312F displays a prepaid balance (hereinafter also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information. In addition to being able to display, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball Based on this, it becomes possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possessions is not recorded and the stored balls are recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the stored balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls Thus, a game by the P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding point are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Number of possessed balls” is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  The “game ball” is data on the number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine. As described above, this data is generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card, the holding ball, or the stored ball.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but is stored in association with the membership card number in the hall server 801F (see FIG. 30) installed in the game hall such as the hall management computer. It is comprised so that the corresponding storage ball can be searched based on. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is directly written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding ball in the card (member card, visitor card) or the hall server 801F is, for example, stored in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. For example, it may be memorized, or it may be memorized in a lump when the card is returned.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A ball lending button (hereinafter also referred to as a lending button) 321F and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU3F. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the balance recorded on the inserted card and using it for a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit and the pachinko machine. With reference to FIG. 29, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. Although not shown, the CU control unit 323F includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as an area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 30) for security management, A security board 325F is provided for communicating with the payout control board 17F while ensuring security. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU side and the payout control board 17F on the P platform side are connected to each other via this connector and connection wiring so as to be communicable. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Although not shown, the security chip (SC) 325bF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 30) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information. Although not shown, the communication control IC 325aF includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a work area for the CPU. A functioning RAM (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  Each RAM of the CU control unit 323F, the security chip (SC) 325bF, and the communication control IC 325aF is configured by a backup RAM whose stored data is not erased even when the power is turned off. Note that an EEPROM may be used instead of the backup RAM.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money classifier, and the identification result signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the data to be written to the inserted card from the CU control unit 323F to the card reader / writer. When transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is output to the display 312F, and the display 312F displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F includes a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a launch motor 18F that drives and controls the launch motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A control board 31F, a variable display device 278F (see FIG. 28), and the like are provided. In FIG. 29, a display control board (also referred to as an effect control board) that controls display of the variable display device based on a command from the main control board 16F is omitted.

  The main control board 16F is provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The game control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F. For example, a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) substrate is used for the game control microcomputer of the main controller 161F. The game board 26F is further provided with a display control board (effect control board) for controlling the variable display device 278F and the like.

  The payout control board 17F is provided in the front frame 5F (game frame). On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. For example, an FPGA board is used for the payout control microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F.

  Also, for the payout control board 17F, a shot ball detection switch (not shown), an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 330F, a counting button 28F, a radio wave sensor 173F, a glass door opening detection switch 12F, a front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. As described above, the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. To do. Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on due to unauthorized radio waves, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F. In addition, there is a possibility that not only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF but also the shot ball detection switch may be subject to fraud by radio waves. In other words, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by the improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected, while the ball that has actually been shot is collected and detected by the shot detection switch The number of fired balls and recovered balls (out-balls) is wrinkled, an abnormality is detected, and the fraud detection information “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. Become. However, by sending unauthorized radio waves to the fired ball detection switch to make it undetectable, there is a problem that the fraud detection information of the “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is not transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. . In this embodiment, since the radio wave sensor 173F also detects the unauthorized radio wave transmitted to such a shot ball detection switch, the above-described inconvenience can be prevented.

  The number of times the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counter not shown. The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  The 7-segment display 50F is connected to the payout control unit 171F, and the 7-segment display 50F displays the number of times the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are opened in accordance with the display control signal from the payout control unit 171F.

  Main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main chip ID (main control security chip ID), winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol confirmation Number of times, jackpot information, manufacturer-specific jackpot information, etc. are transmitted.

  The main chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is information transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. For example, in the prize opening information, the type of the prize opening contains three balls in the big prize opening 271F (see FIG. 28), and information on requesting the payout control board 17F to pay 300 balls as the number of winning balls, Each of 275F and start winning opening 277F (see FIG. 28) includes information for entering one ball and requesting the payout control board 17F to pay out 20 balls as the number of winning balls. In addition, after a ball enters a winning port such as the normal winning port 272F and winning port information requesting the paying out of the winning ball is transmitted to the payout control board 17F, the authentication with the communication partner is disconnected due to power interruption or disconnection. In such a case, the payout control board 17F has already received the winning opening information, and the winning ball can be paid out based on the winning opening information. However, after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, etc., if a floating ball caught in a nail or the like of the game area 27F and not falling enters a winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F, payout The control board 17F cannot receive the winning opening information and cannot pay out the winning ball. For this reason, the prize mouth information is continuously displayed so that even if the floating ball enters the prize opening such as the normal prize opening 272F after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the prize ball can be paid out. An effective period in which the payout control board 17F can receive (write to the information storage unit) is set. As a result, even if the floating ball enters the winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the payout control board 17F displays the winning opening information if it is within the valid period. It is possible to receive award balls based on floating balls. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 1 or a starting winning opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 330F, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and a recovery request, a recovery request 2, a communication start request, Various commands such as a communication end request, a status information request, a card insertion notification, a card return notification, and a communication test request are transmitted.

  The recovery request is a command that requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. The payout control board 17F receives the recovery request and notifies the CU 3F of the recovery information of the P base 2F. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. The communication start request is a command for requesting the P base 2F to start communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication start request and responds to the CU3F with the communication start. The communication end request is a command for requesting the P unit 2F to end communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication end request and returns a communication end response to the CU3F.

  The status information request is a command for requesting notification of status information to the P platform 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the status information request and notifies the CU 3F of the status information of the P platform 2F. The card insertion notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that a card has been inserted. The payout control board 17F receives the card insertion notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been inserted. The card return notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that the card has been returned. The payout control board 17F receives a card return notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been returned. The communication test request is a command for notifying test data to the P base 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the communication test request and returns test data to the CU 3F.

  Various responses such as a recovery response, a recovery response 2, a communication start response, a communication end response, a status information response, a card insertion response, a card return response, and a communication test response are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F.

  The front frame 5F (game frame) is provided with a launch control board 31F and a launch motor 18F. The firing control board 31F emits an excitation output to the firing motor 18F when an input signal of a touch ring (hereinafter also referred to as a touch sensor) for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input, The firing motor 18F is driven.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the firing control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the firing motor 18F. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F.

  An indicator 54F is provided in the front frame 5F (game frame). The display 54F receives display data from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F and displays a display screen. As described above, in this embodiment, the P-side display 54F is configured to be controlled on the CU side, but instead, the display 54F is controlled to be displayed on the P-side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

<Notification processing of operation / non-operation information from pachinko machine>
FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a process of notifying operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. 30 is connected to the CU 3F, the hall server 801F, the key management server 800F, and the history management center 800AF. Here, the key management server 800F is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (hereinafter also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F. The machine history management center 800AF associates the information of the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the semiconductor provided on the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. It includes a history management system that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the chip and manages the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F.

  When the manufacturer (game machine manufacturer) ships the front frame 5F and the game board 26F and installs them in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 30, the game machine installation information (operation information) from the P stand 2F. ) Is notified to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF includes, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F, and the security of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F. The chip ID and the security chip ID of the opponent when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined are included. Note that the security chip ID cannot be changed or deleted after registration in the history management center 800AF.

  On the other hand, shipment information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F shipped by the manufacturer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the shipping information is input to the machine history management center 800AF from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line or the like. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided therein, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is compared with the installed gaming machine information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. As an error notification, for example, an error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, Error notification may be performed by the hall management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed. The information stored in association with the front chip 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID cannot be changed after the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. Further, it is desirable that the shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is registered in the machine history management center 800AF one day before installation in the hall.

  Similarly, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed in the hall is removed and stored in the warehouse, the P stand 2F becomes inactive. As shown in FIG. 30, non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is information that the front chip 5F of the P platform 2F and the security chip ID of the game board 26F that have been installed are not transmitted.

  On the other hand, the history information management center 800AF receives the removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F removed by the hall or warehouse company. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when the second-hand dealer resells the game board 26F to another hall and installs it in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F as shown in FIG. The history management center 800AF is notified. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, the security chip ID of the combined front frame 5F, etc. It is included.

  On the other hand, movement information (resale information) of the game board 26F resold by the secondhand dealer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input movement information of the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in the game board 26F, and is notified from the stored information and the P base 2F. Check against game machine installation information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed by the disposal contractor is discarded, the P stand 2F is in a non-operating state. Thus, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is the security chip of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) of the installed P stand 2F. This is information due to the fact that the ID is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) discarded by the discarder is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the main items of various data stored on the CU 3F side and the P stand 2F side and their transmission / reception modes. With reference to FIG. 31, main ones of various data stored on the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side) and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2F side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of balls (the number of cards), the number of balls, and the card balance (balance) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 31 shows the storage data of the RAM provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and the storage data of the RAM mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on for the first time when the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F are electrically connected for the first time after they are installed in the game hall, the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side Receives the main chip ID (main control security chip ID) from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues the payout chip ID ( The payout control security chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Each time a command and response is transmitted between the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side, the serial number is incremented by “1”, and the serial number is stored on the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side. This serial number is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU 3F and the P base 2F. CU3F (primary station) counts up (+1) and transmits the serial number received at the time of transmission, and P-unit 2F (secondary station) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that the CU3F does not count up the serial number at the time of retransmission, and makes no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The previous last transmission serial number is a communication number updated at the previous transmission / reception and is a number to be backed up.

  A specific mode of serial number backup in the CU 3F and the P stand 2F in this embodiment will be described. The CU 3F counts up the serial number (+1) and transmits the command to the P platform 2F. The P base 2F backup-stores the serial number of the received command as the previous last transmission serial number. Then, the P base 2F transmits a response to the received command to the CU 3F while keeping the serial number of the received command. The CU3F backs up and stores the serial number of the received response as the previous last transmission serial number. The CU 3F and the P base 2F repeat such processing every time a response from the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  For example, a certain command is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the serial number n at that time is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n as the last final transmission serial number and transmits the response with the serial number n as it is. On the CU3F side, the returned serial number n is stored as the last final transmission serial number. Next, when a certain command is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, the serial number is incremented (+1) and the serial number n + 1 is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n + 1 as the last final transmission serial number, and transmits the response while maintaining the serial number n + 1. On the P base 2F side, since the serial number n + 1 transmitted is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the response is sent to the P base 2F side. Reply to the CU3F side. On the CU3F side, the serial number n + 1 returned is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored. Therefore, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the serial number is sent the next time a command is sent. Count up (+1) and send the command of serial number n + 2 to the P platform 2F side.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM in the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 29) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”.

  When a back ball is generated, the back ball is returned to the hitting ball launching position and the ball hitting operation is performed with the ball feeding to the hitting ball launching position being stopped so that all the back balls are fired into the game area. Even if a back ball is generated, the back ball may be controlled not to be counted as an additional ball. In this case, “addition balls = number of winning balls × number of winning balls”.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of stored balls, the balance, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total The number of subtracted balls (cumulative number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls held at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball counter (hereinafter also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. Yes. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, the hall Error notification may be performed by the management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side is replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Also good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 29) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when no holding ball is present)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 29) is an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 29) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls for the withdrawal The number of balls to be added to the number counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosing circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of possessed balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. ing. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 32 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. A response named a recovery response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F. These recovery request 2 and recovery response 2 are basically transmitted / received only when the recovery process is executed. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F only when the CU 3F that has received the recovery response determines that the recovery process is to be executed based on the information of the recovery response. However, even when it is determined not to execute the recovery process, when the recovery request 2 is sent, it may be determined again whether or not the recovery process is executed on the CU 3F side. The recovery process needs to be executed when a power failure occurs in the CU 3F or P stand 2F and a communication line disconnection is detected. In this embodiment, the recovery process is executed even when the power is turned on at the start of business at the amusement hall. However, when the power is turned on at the start of business, the recovery process is not performed, and the power is cut off at the CU3F or the P stand 2F. Control may be performed so that the communication line disconnection is detected.

  A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. A response of a communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. A response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU side to the P platform side shown in FIG.

  A response of a status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. A response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card insertion response is a response to card insertion to the CU3F.

  A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. A response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. A response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

<Main sequences processed between CU and P>
Next, based on FIGS. 33 to 39, processing is performed between the CU 3F and the P base 2F by processing executed by the CPU mounted on the CU control unit 323F and the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17F. The main sequence will be described.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 33 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 34 transmits a command for a status information request including a serial number = n and a card return ready status = OFF to the P table 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. The P unit 2F responds with a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  In response to this, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 35, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding the balls and replaying them will be described. In FIG. 38, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 37 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  In FIG. 37, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 37, immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 38 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 38, the number of cards possessed by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of gaming balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F has a sensor that can determine whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / ejecting port 309F. If the sensor signal is in the ON state, the CU 3F is determined to be in the card removal possible state. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Moreover, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with a speaker. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F. The CU3F not only notifies the P stand 2F that the card can be removed, but also a hall computer that is a device connected to the CU 3F or the P stand 2F, a call lamp mounted on the P stand 2F. The device may be notified that the card can be removed. Thereby, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting to remove the card (removal of the recording medium) by notifying other than the CU 3F and the P stand 2F that the card can be removed.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in an ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting a state information including “Waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so that the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and the card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  Note that the sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 38 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. In FIG. 39, in particular, there is a power disconnection / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is once turned OFF and then turned ON again), and the status information request has not arrived (from CU3F to the P base 2F). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 39, before the power interruption occurs during the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F sends a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3F in order to notify the CU 3F of the game table information. To do. The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. After that, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission serial number = n, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. For this reason, in this case, the P table 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game table information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1) including game information is returned to the CU3F. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  In FIG. 39, the CU3F does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform the addition recovery process. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process.

<Management of gaming machines>
Next, a system for managing the history of gaming machines from shipment to disposal will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the flow of history information (machine history information) from shipment to disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the target of the gaming machine that manages the history is not limited to the above-described enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P 2F), and includes a conventional CR gaming machine. Of course, the target gaming machine includes not only pachinko gaming machines but also S machines (slot machines) 2SF corresponding to P machines 2F described later, conventional pachislot machines, and the like.

  Referring to FIG. 40, when a gaming machine is shipped from a gaming machine maker to Hall A, the gaming machine manufacturer's server (not shown) displays shipping information about the shipped gaming machine through a communication line. The information is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input shipping information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing details of a flow until shipping information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 41, when ordering a gaming machine from a gaming machine maker, Hall A sends a sales contract to the gaming machine maker. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives the sales contract sent from Hall A, it confirms the order of the gaming machine according to the sales contract. When the gaming machine manufacturer confirms the order, it sends a copy of the warranty card and the certification notice to Hall A and starts production of the gaming machine. The gaming machine manufacturer ships the produced gaming machine to Hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer (delivered to Hall A). In addition, after a gaming machine to be shipped to Hall A is delivered to a carrier, the gaming machine manufacturer's server inputs shipping information regarding the gaming machine to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the shipping information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of the shipping information. Specifically, FIG. 42A is a diagram showing items registered as shipping information. FIG. 42B is a diagram showing registration classifications included in the registration type.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (a), shipping information includes registration type, game board production number, main board management number, main control chip ID number (main chip ID), main control product code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a payout control chip ID number (payout chip ID), a payout control product code, a shipping date, a company code, a hall code, and a cancellation flag.

  The registration type indicates whether the gaming machine to be shipped is a conventional CR gaming machine, an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P stand 2F), a gaming board with a replaced part, or a gaming machine frame. This is information to specify. Specifically, in FIG. 42B, when the registration type number is “11” to “14”, the gaming machine to be shipped is a CR gaming machine, and when “21” to “25”. Indicates that the gaming machine to be shipped is P 2F. Furthermore, the registration type numbers “11” to “14” indicate that the game board, the gaming machine frame, the gaming board + the gaming machine frame, and the gaming board (parts replacement) are replaced. Also, the registration type numbers “21” to “25” indicate that they are replaced gaming boards, gaming machine frames, gaming boards + gaming machine frames, gaming board parts, gaming machine frame parts, respectively. When replacing the board of the game board or the board of the gaming machine frame, the board management number after replacement is set and registered when the base is replaced. In addition, replacement of parts in which the production numbers of the game board and the gaming machine frame are changed is registered as a new shipment. Note that the name of the gaming machine manufacturer and the model name of the gaming machine are specified by the registration type.

The game board production number and main board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code.
The main control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine). The main control product code is the product code of the main control chip (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine).

  The gaming machine frame manufacturing number and the payout board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code. Note that the payout board management number does not need to be set in a conventional CR gaming machine.

  The payout control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine). The payout control product code is a product code written in the payout control chip (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine).

  The shipment date is the date when the gaming machine is shipped, and is the date when shipment is confirmed. The business operator code is information for specifying the name of the carrier. The hole code is information for identifying the hall name of the delivery destination. The cancellation flag is set to “0” when shipping information is registered, and “1” when canceling registered shipping information. When the gaming machine manufacturer has registered incorrect shipping information in the machine history management center 800AF, the gaming machine manufacturer sets a cancellation flag for the incorrect shipping information to “1” and registers it again in the machine history management center 800AF.

  When the history management center 800AF receives the shipping information with the cancellation flag set to “1”, the history management center 800AF cancels the registration of the shipping information with the same content as the received shipping information and the cancellation flag set to “0”. That is, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” is deleted from the storage area of the history management center 800AF. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state).

  Further, the machine history management center 800AF can accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the shipping information having the same contents as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” cannot be registered in the history management center 800AF.

  Here, examples of the predetermined condition include time and period. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can be set to accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until 8:00 pm on the day when the shipping information to be canceled is registered. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state), and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after 8:00 pm on the registration date) ) Can be prevented from tampering with shipping information.

  If the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F), the main control chip ID number or the payout control chip ID number serves as identification information for identifying the individual gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a conventional CR In the case of a gaming machine, at least one number of a gaming board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturing number, and a payout board management number is identification information for identifying an individual gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the shipping information is made the same format regardless of whether the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F) or a conventional CR gaming machine. In the management center 800AF, the history of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F) and the conventional CR gaming machine can be managed in a unified manner.

  Referring to FIG. 40 again, when a gaming machine is delivered to hall A from a gaming machine manufacturer and the gaming machine is installed in hall A, a server (not shown) in hall A is connected via a communication line. Installation information regarding the installed gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the input installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing details of the flow until installation information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 43A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. . In FIG. 43 (a), the conventional CR gaming machine is mainly used, and the conventional CR gaming machine is installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line. The case is assumed.

  FIG. 43B is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 43 (b), this is mainly the case of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F), and the P stand 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line. Is assumed.

  Referring to FIG. 43 (a), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a copy of the gaming machine delivery form, the gaming machine installation information is input from the gaming machine manufacturer to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, and the input installation information is stored in the storage area of the server. be registered. When installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF, the registration result is output via a communication line or as a document. In Hall A, when a jurisdiction implementation inspection is conducted and a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A.

  Referring to FIG. 43 (b), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. Thereafter, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is performed, and when a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A. Since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be connectable via a communication line, when the gaming machine installed in the hall A is turned on, the history is automatically transferred from the hall computer. Installation information is transmitted to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the received installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the installation information input to the history management center 800AF in FIG. Referring to FIG. 44, the installation information includes a registration type, a game board production number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame production number, an installation date, a hall code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, hall code, and cancellation flag are the same as those described in FIG. 42, detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 43 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A. Therefore, the registration type numbers are “11” to “14”. Become. The installation date is, for example, the planned opening date of the warranty card.

  From the above, in the case of FIG. 43 (a), the machine history management center 800AF has the gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, gaming board production number, main board management number, as installation information input from the gaming machine manufacturer. A game frame serial number, installation date, and installation hall name are registered.

  Further, in the case of FIG. 43 (b), the machine history management center 800AF has, as installation information automatically transmitted from the hall computer, a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, installation date, installation destination hall name, The main control chip ID and the payout control ID are registered. The history management center 800AF may receive the above-mentioned part of information as installation information, and register information that is common with the shipping information with reference to the shipping information.

  Referring again to FIG. 40, when the gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the removal information from hall A is written in a document or the like, and the document is sent to history management center 800AF. Based on the removal information sent to the machine history management center 800AF, the removal information is registered in the storage area of the server by inputting necessary information from the input means (terminal not shown) of the machine history management center 800AF. If the document is not sent to the machine history management center 800AF, it is determined that the gaming machine has been removed from the hall A when second-hand movement information or disposal information described later is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. The removal information may be registered.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flow until removal information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 45A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. In FIG. 45A, it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line.

  FIG. 45B is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 45 (b), it is assumed that the P unit 2F is mainly installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line.

  Referring to FIG. 45 (a), when the gaming machine installed in Hall A is removed, the gaming machine is removed based on the issued change approval application. When the gaming machine is removed, a document including removal information is sent from the hall A to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the removal information in the storage area based on the sent document.

  Referring to FIG. 45B, since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable, the history management center 800AF is based on the installation information registered in the storage area. If a certain period of time (for example, one month) has passed and no communication with the gaming machine that should have been installed in Hall A, it is determined that the gaming machine has not been operated and has been removed. Then, the removal information is registered in the storage area. 45A, the history management center 800AF may register the removal information in the storage area based on the document sent from the hall A.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is to be removed, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a game board production number, a main board management number, a game frame production number, a removal date, and removal as removal information. The hall name is registered. In addition, when the P stand 2F is removed, in the machine history management center 800AF, a removal control board management number is further registered as removal information in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine. Is done.

  Referring to FIG. 40 again, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is stored in the seller's warehouse, and the received gaming machine is released to another Hall B, the seller enters the application document. The used movement information is entered and sent to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers second-hand movement information in the server from the input means of the machine history management center 800AF based on the sent application documents. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer owned by the dealer are configured to be communicable, the management computer inputs the used movement information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Also good.

  When a gaming machine delivered from a dealer is delivered to another hall B and the gaming machine is installed in another hall B, the installation is performed in the other hall B as described in FIG. Information is registered in the server of the machine history management center 800AF. Also, when the gaming machine installed in the hall B is removed, the removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF in the flow described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is collected by the processing company and the collected gaming machine is discarded, the disposal information is entered in the application document from the processing company, and the document is recorded. It is sent to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the discard information in the storage area by inputting necessary information from the input means in the own device. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer of the processing company are configured to be communicable, the management computer can input the discard information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Good.

  Further, when the gaming machine traded in from the hall A by the gaming machine maker is discarded, the hall computer inputs the discard information regarding the gaming machine to be discarded via the communication line to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input discard information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flow until discard information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 46, when a gaming machine manufacturer gives a notice of acceptance of trade-in of a gaming machine to hall A, the gaming machine is delivered from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When a gaming machine maker collects and stores the gaming machine and then discards it, it requests the disposal company (disposal company) to dispose of it. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a notification from the processing company that the disposal of the gaming machine has been completed (processing details, etc.), the gaming machine manufacturer's server sends the disposal information about the gaming machine via the communication line. Input to the management center 800AF. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the discard information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the discard information input to the machine history management center 800AF.

  Referring to FIG. 47, the discard information includes registration type, discard date, game board manufacturer code, game board manufacture number, main board management number, gaming machine frame manufacturer code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a company code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, and cancellation flag are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 42, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The discard date is the date when the gaming machine is discarded. The game board manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the game board. The gaming machine frame manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine frame. The business operator code is information for identifying the business operator that has performed the disposal process. Typically, it is the operator code of the processing company (disposal company), but when it is discarded by the gaming machine manufacturer, it becomes the operator code of the gaming machine manufacturer.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is discarded, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a gaming board production number, a main board management number, a gaming frame production number, a disposal date, and processing as disposal information. The trader name is registered. In addition, when the P unit 2F is discarded, in the machine history management center 800AF, in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine, a payout control board management number is further registered as discard information. Is done.

<Management of front frame and game board>
In the machine history management center described above, the configuration for managing the history of the gaming machine (P machine 2F) has been described. However, since the P machine 2F is formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, the front frame 5F and the game It is also possible to manage the history separately for the board 26F. Therefore, machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be described below.

  FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram for explaining history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F according to the present embodiment. The machine history management center 800AF shown in FIG. 48 associates information on the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. The information of the game board 26F is stored in the table shown in FIG. 49 in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in FIG. 49, and the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is managed. The history management center 800AF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 8001F as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 8002F that stores operation programs and control data of the CPU 8001F, and a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU 8001F. A (Random Access Memory) 8003F, an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 8004F, and a mass storage device 8005F such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) are provided.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram of a table that stores information on the front frame 5F and information on the game board 26F in order to manage the machine history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. In the table shown in FIG. 49, a payout side table (FIG. 49 (a)) for storing information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the payout control board 17F, and a security chip ID of the main control board 16F. A main control side table (FIG. 49B) that stores information on the game board 26F is included.

  Hereinafter, the machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. First, at the time of shipment and installation, (1) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and ships it to the frame manufacturer 191F, which is the manufacturer of the front frame 5F. (2) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the main control semiconductor chip 16aF and ships it to the game board manufacturer 192F, which is the manufacturer of the game board 26F. The payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and the main control semiconductor chip 16aF are not limited to the case where they are manufactured by the same semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F, and may be manufactured by different semiconductor chip manufacturers 190F.

  (3-1) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the history management center 800AF of the payout control security chip ID of the manufactured payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and inputs the payout control security chip ID into the payout side table. Update the payout table. Similarly, (3-2) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the main control security chip ID of the manufactured main control semiconductor chip 16aF, and the main control side security chip ID is sent to the main control side table. To update the main control table.

  (4) The frame maker 191F incorporates the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF into the front frame 5F to manufacture the front frame 5F. Further, the frame maker 191F ships and installs the manufactured front frame 5F to the hall 193F. (5) The frame maker 191F notifies the history management center 800AF of information specifying the front frame 5F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. As information for specifying the front frame 5F, as shown in FIG. 49A, the front frame manufacturing number, the delivery board management number, the product code for delivery control, the transporter code, the hall code, the shipping date, and the installation Date and time are included. Further, the information specifying the front frame 5F may include a frame format name, a product code, and a manufacturer code.

  (6) The game board maker 192F incorporates the main control semiconductor chip 16aF into the game board 26F to manufacture the game board 26F. Further, the game board maker 192F ships the manufactured game board 26F to the hall 193F and installs the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in combination. (7) The game board maker 192F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. To do. As information specifying the game board 26F, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the model name of the gaming machine, product code, manufacturer code, game board production number, main control board management number, product code for main control , Carrier code, hall code, shipping date, and installation date and time.

  (8) The hall 193F operates the P stand 2F formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. (9) The key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and pays out so as to store a pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The side table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF includes the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F, the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the semiconductor chip maker 190F, the frame maker 191F, and the game board maker 192F. Is matched.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-1) and (5) shown in FIG. 49A) included in the payout table is updated. (Status) is “Shipment”, and the management state of the front frame 5F in which the information on the main control security chip ID of the pair included in the payout side table (information (9) shown in FIG. 49A) is updated ( (Status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the front frame 5F may be stored in the payout side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Similarly, the machine history management center 800AF uses the game board 26F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-2) and (7) shown in FIG. 49B) included in the main control table is updated. The game board 26F in which the management state (status) is “shipment” and the payout control security chip ID information (information (9) shown in FIG. 49B) included in the main control side table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the game board 26F may be stored in the main control side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Next, at the time of storage, (10) When the hole 193F is replaced with a new front frame 5F and game board 26F, the installed front frame 5F and game board 26F are removed and stored in the warehouse. (11) The warehouse operator 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the front frame 5F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the warehouse trader 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the game board 26F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 49, the storage information of the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F includes a gaming machine manufacturer, an installation source hall, a removal date, a storage date, and a storage location.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed from the hall 193F, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operating information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the removed front frame 5F and game board 26F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the warehouse operator 194F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as storage dates (information (11) shown in FIG. 49) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined as “Storage”. When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed, it is not always necessary to remove the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and removed. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (11) (see FIG. 49) of either the payout side table or the main control side table.

  Next, at the time of resale, (12) the hall 193F requests the second trader 195F to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored by the warehouse trader 194F. The used trader 195F resells the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F to another hall and installs them in the hall. (13) The used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information on the resold front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. In addition, the used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information of the resold game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 49, the resale information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a removal date, an installation date, and a sales company name.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, they are installed in different halls, and the P frame 2F is operated by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. Further, the key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and stores the pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF collates the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the second-hand trader 195F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. Further, the machine history management center 800AF manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as sales company names (information (13) shown in FIG. 49) included in the payout side table and the main control sales table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “resale”, and the front frame 5F and the game in which the information on the security chip ID of the pair (information (9) shown in FIG. 49) included in the payout side table and the main control side table is updated The management state (status) of the panel 26F is determined as “installation”. When reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be resold. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (13) (see FIG. 49) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not necessarily limited to reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse, but the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall. May be resold. In addition, we do not re-ship at the time of resale.

  Next, at the time of disposal, (14) the hole 193F requests the disposal company 196F to discard the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F. The discard trader 196F discards the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F by an appropriate method. (15) The discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 49, the discard information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a take-off date, and a discard date.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that the non-operation information is transmitted from the discarded front frame 5F and the game board 26F to the key management server 800F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the discarder 196F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 49) included in the payout side table and the main control side table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “Discard”. When discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to discard the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and discarded. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (15) (see FIG. 49) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F are not necessarily limited to the case where the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse are discarded. 26F may be discarded.

<Abnormality judgment of machine history management center>
If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of comparing the gaming machine installation information and the non-operating information with the updated information as described above, the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining the abnormality determination process of management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by the machine history management center 800AF. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the machine history management center 800AF determines the management state (status) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on information included in the payout side table and the main control side table (SF211). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF includes the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the disposal date (information (15) shown in FIG. 49) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “discard”.

  Next, the history management center 800AF checks whether or not the transition from the previously determined management state to the currently determined management state is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212). As shown in FIG. 51A, the transition prohibition table indicates a management state in which transition is prohibited from the management state determined last time. Specifically, when the frame maker 191F manufactures and ships the front frame 5F, the front frame 5F is not discarded or resold. Therefore, in the transition prohibition table, the management state changes from “shipment” to “discard”. Transition to “resale” is prohibited. In addition, since the front frame 5F once installed, stored and resold is not shipped from the frame maker 191F, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is “installed”, “storage” and “resale” to “shipment”. ”Is prohibited. Further, since the discarded front frame 5F is not shipped, installed, stored, and resold, the management status is changed from “discarded” to “shipped”, “installed”, “stored”, and “resolded” in the transition prohibition table. ”Is prohibited. In the above-described transition prohibition table, the front frame 5F has been described as an example, but the same applies to the game board 26F.

  Next, when the change to the management state determined this time is not included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: N), the machine history management center 800AF, based on the information from the key management server 800F, the front frame 5F and the game board The operating state of 26F is determined (SF213). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF determines that the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F, and determines that the machine is operating, and when the non-operation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F (gaming machine installation information). Is not transmitted), it is determined as a non-operating state.

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF checks whether or not the management state determined this time in SF211 and the operation state determined in SF213 are included in the update abnormality table (SF214). As shown in the update abnormality table, FIG. 51 (b), the operating state prohibited in the management state determined this time in SF211 is shown. Specifically, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, they are in an operating state if they are within business hours, but are normally inactive if they are out of business hours. When the status is “Installation”, it is determined as abnormal if “Operates outside business hours”. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are not installed, the operation status is always inactive. Therefore, in the update abnormality table, the management status is “shipment”, “storage”, “resale”, and “discard”. When it becomes “operation”, it is determined as abnormal.

  Next, when the determined operating state is included in the update abnormality table (SF214: Y), the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality (SF215). The means for notifying the abnormality in SF 215 may be any means such as displaying the abnormality on the display device of the history management center 800AF or outputting an alarm sound from the audio output device. The history management center 800AF also reports an abnormality (SF215) when the transition to the management state determined this time is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: Y).

  The machine history management center 800AF ends the process when the determined operating state is not included in the update abnormality table (SF214: N).

  As described above, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment uses the payout side table that stores the history information of the front frame 5F in association with the payout control security chip ID and the history information of the game board 26F for main control. The main control side table stored in association with the security chip ID is included in the mass storage device 8005F, and the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on the information stored in the payout side table and the main control side table by the CPU 8001F Judge abnormalities. Therefore, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment can manage the history by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that may be distributed separately with each security chip ID.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 29, the communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between main control unit 161F, payout control unit 171F, and communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F illustrated in FIG. 52 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but a similar function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF controls the various processing (the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F by the payout control unit 171F, or from the game ball to the holding ball to the CU3F based on the signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion). The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 53 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and encryption communication for performing encryption communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 55 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 55, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and a business message is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 56 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation process.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 57 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described with reference to FIGS.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, a sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. The sequence shown in FIG. 58 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a process when the status information request is unreached due to a power failure / communication line disconnection will be described. In FIG. 59, in particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 59, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main controller 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to S units in the same manner. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 60, S platform (slot machine) 2SF is provided such that front door 2bSF is openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2aSF with its left edge as a swing center. Although not shown in FIG. 60, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display unit 54F of FIG. 29, and is controlled to be displayed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, a 7-segment display 50SF is provided in a lower portion of the display 510F. The 7-segment display 50SF is a display corresponding to the P 7-segment display 50F, and displays various types of information (such as the number of times the front door 2bSF is opened) of the same type as the 7-segment display 50F.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points are obtained by withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, the points, or the stored medals (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the bet number to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is assigned to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 60, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28SF for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 29). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P base 2F or the S base 2SF. .

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). The main control unit of the S base 2SF is mounted on a main control board corresponding to the main control board 16F mounted on the P base 2F. The main control unit determines the presence / absence of a winning combination by, for example, drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base transmits a signal corresponding to the type of winning to the payout control unit (corresponding to the payout control unit 171F in FIG. 29). The payout control unit gives the player a number of game points corresponding to the signal (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 61 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 31 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Now, further explanation is omitted.

  The information to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F includes a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the current gaming state. A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. Note that the information output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F is not configured to be output to the outside from the information output circuit as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, but is output from the main control unit 161F via the payout control unit 171F. You may make it do.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information on the number of reserved memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a reserved memory number signal that can specify the latest reserved memory number in the current gaming state can be output from the game control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  In addition to the above-described information, the game control microcomputer on the main control board 16F includes a launch stop signal, a radio wave sensor detection signal, a magnet in addition to the information described above. Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal winning detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the various information may be managed on the payout control microcomputer side.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact in the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly stopping the firing when operated). Is operated, the hitting operation handle 25F is not rotated more than a certain rotation angle, or the card unit (CU) 3F and the pachinko machine (P stand) 2F are not electrically connected. This is output when the game control microcomputer determines that a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 16 by the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 163F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal indicates that the magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (illegal magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (game control microcomputer), and a magnet is used to Based on an illegal game using a magnet such as changing the trajectory, a magnetism sensor signal is input to the main control board 16F based on an illegal game using a magnet, and a magnet sensor error is determined in the game control microcomputer. Is output based on.

  The unauthorized winning detection signal is sent to the winning winning opening of the winning sensor 162F in a state in which the counting winning switch is connected to the main control board 16F and the winning switch is closed. When an illegal winning error is determined by detecting a winning ball in the big winning mouth in the gaming control microcomputer based on the detection signal of the winning sensor for detecting the winning ball of the game, an output is made based on the determination. .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when the setting of various game information (game state information) transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is completed when the power of the pachinko machine (P units) 2F is turned on. The Such a game state information setting completion signal is used as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side), for example.

  In addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for game control on the main control board 16F from the payout control microcomputer on the payout control board 17F includes the following glass frame / main body frame opening signal, the number of winnings. Various information such as abnormal signal, illegal addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, night open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving transition request signal The various information may be managed on the game control microcomputer side.

  The glass frame / main body frame opening signal is generated when the detection signal from the glass door opening detection switch 12F or the front frame opening detection switch 13F is input to the dispensing control board 17F. When the opening of the front frame 5F is determined, the output is made based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with respect to the number of winnings by the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Whether or not the winning number is abnormal is determined based on the determination, and when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal, an output is made based on the determination.

  The illegal addition detection signal indicates that an illegal addition error is determined by the payout control microcomputer when the payout control board 17F receives a coin addition request from the CU3F in a state other than when the card is inserted into the CU3F. Based on the output.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer because the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormal signal is generated by winning sensor 162F, ball raising switch (upper) 41aF, foul ball detection switch 330F, out ball detection switch 701F, and launch ball detection switch due to a change in capacitance due to the passage of the ball. It is composed of proximity switches to be detected. For such proximity switches, the dispensing control microcomputer determines whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of balls detected, and when the abnormality is determined, the determination Is output based on. For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected. On the other hand, when the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the shot ball detecting switch, It is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal because wrinkles occur in the number of fire balls and recovery balls (out balls).

  The night open detection signal is output when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened as follows. At night when the pachinko machine 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on the detection signals output from the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F by the above-described counting counter operated by the backup power supply. The number of times the front frame 5F has been opened is counted. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 2F is turned on, either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer by the count value of each opening number output from the count counter to the payout control board 17F. Is determined. It is also possible to detect the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F and output the nighttime opening detection signal.

  The count notification request signal is output to make a request to notify the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that a count request has been made in response to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to execute audio output and numerical display related to counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify the card return ready state OFF and card removal waiting ON information when the payout control microcomputer determines that the card can be removed by the CU 3F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact (for example, when it has not detected for a predetermined period) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving transition request signal is “0”. When it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition is satisfied, for example, when a card is not inserted into the CU3F or when a variable display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight Is output as an operation request signal for shifting to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control is performed such as a decrease in light emission and stop of light emission of various lamps.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown in which the information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won. Such an external output of the winning information signal may be applied to the pachinko machine (P units) 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the reserved memory number signal, the emission stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted from the game control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the payout control microcomputer. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above may be applied. In addition, the transmission of various signals such as the glass frame / main body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the game control microcomputer has been described above. You may apply in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the above gaming system, for example, there are P units of reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, 33F, the launch control board 31F, and the launch motor 18F of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in the present embodiment, such a problem can be prevented by providing a function for displaying a dollar box. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, or point payout operation) from a prepaid card balance, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510F and display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510F and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (2) In this embodiment, a game point is added by consuming card frequency. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (3) In this embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (4) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU3F, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described above. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (5) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (6) When an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is desirable to display a message prompting the counting on the P-unit or the CU side display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (7) The counting time from the start of the counting operation to the completion of the counting display is based on the game points when the game points are less than the first reference value and when the game points exceed the first reference value. The increasing rate of the counting time may be reduced. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect of counting display as if counting real spheres, and it is possible to prevent an excessive amount of time until counting is completed due to an increase in game points. Further, when the game points exceed a certain reference value, all the counting times may be the same. Alternatively, the same counting time may be adopted regardless of the number of game points without providing a reference value.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the glass door 6F opening detection and the front frame 5F opening detection are detected by the separate glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F. Alternatively, both may be detected by a common detection switch.

  (9) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function for turning on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and 2 within 1 second from the operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (10) When the counting operation button is operated for less than a predetermined time (short-time operation), for example, the first number of balls is counted, and when operated for a predetermined time or longer (long-time operation), the first operation is performed according to the operation time. It is desirable to control so that the number of balls larger than the number of balls of 1 is counted. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls are counted in the short-time operation, while a predetermined number exceeding 100 balls, for example, 200 balls or 400 balls, is counted in the long-time operation. Also, the number of game points to be counted may be controlled to be different depending on the long press time of the counting operation button. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls start to be counted by long-pressing for 1 second, and if the long-pressing continues for 5 seconds as it is, all the remaining balls are counted. Alternatively, it may be controlled such that a predetermined number is counted by one operation and all remaining balls are counted by the fifth operation.

  (11) (A) The fact that game points equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of points” are not stored does not count game points even if a counting operation is performed, and a notification to that effect is given. Also, (B) when the game points are counted until the stored game points reach the “predetermined number of points”, no more counting is possible, and control is performed so that a notification to that effect is given. Is desirable. The same number may be adopted as the predetermined number of points in these two cases (A) and (B), that is, the reference value may be different.

  (12) When the counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, it is desirable to control the counting operation to be invalidated when the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. However, even if the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number. In some cases, the counting operation may be invalidated when the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected does not satisfy the reference value.

  Further, in order to invalidate the counting operation during the game, it is desirable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the ball firing operation is detected. Instead of this, or in addition to this, whether the number of in-game balls (floating ball floating in the game area 27F) is 0 (not in game) or not (in game) It may be determined whether or not. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) When the number of game balls is greater than a predetermined number regardless of whether or not a big hit is being made, a display prompting a counting operation may be performed.

  In addition, if the counting operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display for prompting the counting operation, the game ball may be forcibly stopped, and the firing is not forcibly stopped. It may be.

  (14) Referring to FIG. 31, the P platform includes a counting ball counter that temporarily stores counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores a cumulative value of counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (15) The display for prompting the counting operation may be a display of “Please play the game after the game balls remain, so please return it” or display the counting button 28F on the screen. The display may be blinking.

  (16) When the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more), control is performed so that “control for performing a display prompting a counting operation on a display device” is executed as “predetermined notification control”. Is desirable. Here, “prompt counting operation” means, for example, a message that displays “Counting operation because the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” or a message that simply displays “Counting operation is required.” It may be. Further, the “predetermined notification control” may be a control for outputting a notification sound for prompting a counting operation from a speaker. Further, the “notification” may not be “notification for prompting the counting operation” but simply notify that “the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” (not to prompt for the counting operation). .

  Further, when the game point is equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference value (3000 balls or more), “predetermined notification control” is performed, and thereafter, the game point is set to a second reference value greater than the first reference value. It may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the game point is reached, and the game is permitted (no firing prohibited) until the game point reaches the second reference value from the first reference value. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the inoperable state can be realized by controlling the start lever to operate so that the reel does not start rotating or the betting number setting is invalidated.

  (17) When a game using game points is being performed (while the ball is being fired), control is performed so that the counting operation is not validated unless there are more than a predetermined number of game points (for example, 250 points). It is desirable to do. Here, the predetermined number of points is not limited to 250 points, and may be any number as long as it is 1 point or more. However, for example, when an excessively small number of points such as one point is set, a malfunction occurs when the timing of firing and the timing of counting occur almost simultaneously. Alternatively, if a counting operation is detected when the number of points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 points or less) and the counting operation is detected, 5 points are left for launching and the remaining points are counted. You may control to.

  In addition, when it is detected that a player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated because there are no more points left than the predetermined number of points has been stopped, it is invalidated first. The counting operation may be activated to automatically start the counting operation. That is, in this case, the player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated only needs to stop the firing operation, and does not need to perform the counting operation again.

  (18) In order to change the number of game points to be converted by one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (19) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short pressing operation of the counting button is made different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (20) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (21) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on a counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (22) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (23) In FIG. 31 or 61, the game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU It may not be stored on the side. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (24) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (25) In the CU, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (26) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (held ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (27) When the counting operation is executed, the points may be counted up at an accelerated rate when a predetermined time has elapsed since the counting up of the points was started. Alternatively, a speed-up button for accelerating the count display may be displayed on the touch panel display on the CU side or the gaming machine side, and the operation may be detected to display the acceleration count display. By performing the acceleration counting display of the points in this way, the waiting time of the player when counting a large number of gaming points can be shortened.

  (28) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the touch sensor detects that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (29) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (30) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 33 to 39 is not limited to a transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc., particularly for processing related to security. For example, the present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a CU3F, a P stand 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID. However, instead of or in addition to this, the identity of the player is determined based on the biomass of the player's fingerprint or retina. May be performed.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, a so-called enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F and S stand 2SF) is shown, but it is not limited thereto, and a game medium (such as a pachinko ball) is provided from the upper part of the island. It may be a general gaming machine that is supplied to a gaming machine and from which a gaming medium is paid out by winning. Specifically, the game is performed by hitting the balls stored in the ball storage tray into the game area, and when winning, the balls are paid out to the ball storage tray, and are paid out to the ball storage tray at the end of the game. Pachinko machines that can exchange prizes using balls may also be used. Also, the coins stored in the coin tray are inserted into the coin slot, the number of bets is input and set, and the reel is rotated and stopped by operating the start lever. When a display result winning that is sometimes displayed has occurred, a slit machine may be used in which coins are paid out to a coin tray, and paid out to the coin tray at the end of the game so that prizes can be exchanged using the coin. That is, a gaming machine that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, coins) and that pays out game media to the player in accordance with the result of the game may be used.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are calculated. It may be controlled so that the number of game balls and game points are added after being withdrawn.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is deducted within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding ball, savings ball) and the corresponding game points are added, In the above example, game points having the same value are added, but instead, for example, control may be performed so that game points corresponding to consumption tax are added to the value actually deducted.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, authentication is performed using various authentication keys, but authentication may be performed using, for example, an authentication ID instead of the various authentication keys.

  (36) You may comprise the above-mentioned indicator 54F and 510F with a display with a touch panel. Further, the information transmitted / received between the P platform and the CU is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment, and it is a game that determines what information is output from the P platform to the CU. You may enable it to perform input setting by touch operation with the touch panel of the display units 54F and 510F.

  Also, in the S stand 2SF, the information output from the S stand 2SF is converted and transmitted to Hallcon in the same manner as the P stand 2F described above. As information to be converted, for example, a big bonus prize or a regular bonus prize is given. And winning information such as various small role winnings, information indicating that the replay time is in progress, the number of additions and subtractions in FIG. 61, the number of game starts, and the like. Further, the information to be converted may be the number of coins to be paid out when coins are paid out with winning.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that “the gaming device (CU) is a predetermined player with the gaming points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion processing for all gaming points is completed (game points = 0)”. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) ”.

  Here, the enabling means is, for example, “means for confirming game point 0 on the P platform side and transmitting card discharge operation permission ON to CU” or “game when receiving card return notification from CU”. It is determined whether or not the number of balls is 0, and in the case of 0, a means for validating card return by returning a card return response to the CU ", and further," game by performing counting operation etc. " It is a concept that includes “means for establishing the condition that the number of balls = 0 and consequently the card return is valid”.

(38) When the payout control unit 171F receives a value (= 63) in which the round flag is raised, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or more of those listed in the following a to c You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (39) In the present embodiment, information specifying the front frame 5F, storage information, resale information, disposal information, and the like are included as history information of the front frame 5F stored in association with the payout control security chip ID in the payout side table. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as history information of the front frame 5F. Similarly, in the present embodiment, information specifying the game board 26F, storage information, resale information, discard information, and the like are stored as history information of the game board 26F stored in the main control side table in association with the main control security chip ID. Examples included are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as the history information of the game board 26F.

  (40) In this embodiment, after a manufacturer, warehouse, etc. completes operations such as shipping / installation / storage, necessary information (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, for example, from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF). The delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting the shipping date, installation date and time, removal date, sales company name, and disposal date). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a manufacturer or a warehouse company fills in application documents with necessary information and sends the information to the history management center 800AF. The payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting necessary information from a terminal or the like. Note that a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF is also a terminal connected directly to the machine history management center 800AF (for example, an internal terminal in the machine history management center 800AF) via a communication line. It may be a terminal (for example, a terminal of a warehouse company or a second-hand company connected via the Internet).

  (41) In this embodiment, an example in which the payout side table and the main control side table are stored in one large capacity storage device 8005F has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the payout side table and the main control side table are stored separately in a plurality of large capacity storage devices, the large capacity storage device that stores the payout side table and the main control side table are stored. It may be divided into a mass storage device. Further, the payout side table and the main control side table stored in the large-capacity storage device can erase the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for each security chip ID. Even if it is associated with a pair of security chip IDs, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F can be deleted separately for each security chip ID. Thereby, even if it is the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (the period used is long compared with the front frame 5F) from which the period used is different, it can delete separately, respectively, and it can manage appropriately, respectively. it can.

  (42) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which a manufacturer other than the hall, a warehouse company, etc. update the payout side table and the main control side table by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting information necessary for the hall itself to the machine history management center 800AF.

  (43) In this embodiment, when a second-hand trader resells the front frame 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs them, the resale information is stored as history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when moving to another hole in the same group as the hole in which the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed (for example, a hole with the same corporate code), the front frame 5F and the game board The movement information may be stored in the history information as a simple movement of 26F (management state (status) from “installation” to “installation”). That is, even if the installation of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F moves between holes of the same corporate code, it is not determined as abnormal. In addition, if the movement of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is permitted between halls of the same corporate code and within the same prefecture, and if it moves to other prefectures between halls of the same corporate code, the same processing as resale is performed. May be.

  (44) In this embodiment, the history management center 800AF is set as follows, for example. In the machine history management center 800AF, a user registered in the system and authenticated by clear authentication is logged into the system. Authentication at login is as follows: (a) The specified user ID exists in the system. (B) The specified user is within the account expiration date. (C) The specified user is not account-locked. (D) The entered password matches the password of the specified user ID. (E) If the current password is not within the validity period, the user is logged in, but only the user's own password change and logout can be used, and a message is displayed indicating that the password must be changed. If the password is changed, log out to confirm the use of the new password.

  When the authentication is successful, the history management center 800AF clears the number of login failures and the continuous login error date / time of the user. On the other hand, the history management center 800AF records the number of login failures when the authentication fails or when the user actually exists. Each time the number of login failures reaches [the maximum number of login attempts] (when it becomes an integer multiple), the date and time when the account is locked is set.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the password expiration date when (a) a new user is registered, (b) when the password is cleared, and (c) when the user changes the password. The updated / set password is valid from that point until the [Password Validity Period] elapses.

  If the authentication fails [the maximum number of login attempts] in the same session, the history management center 800AF transitions to the login NG screen instead of the login screen and does not attempt to log in.

  The history management center 800AF warns that at the time of login, the password may expire if the password of the user expires within the [password expiration warning period]. The warning is displayed on the login completion screen, for example, but if there is no message to be displayed on the login completion screen, the login completion screen is not displayed and the screen transits to the HOME menu.

  The machine history management center 800AF determines that (a) the number of failed login attempts by a user exceeds the [number of failed user login failures] (permanent account lock state), or (b) ] Has not passed (temporary account lock state), lock account.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the account expiration date when (a) a new user is registered or (b) the validity period is updated from the user information screen. The account can be used during the period from the account activation start date to the account activation end date.

  The history management center 800AF sets, for example, 20 as the maximum number of accounts that can be generated at one time at the time of initial introduction. Here, [the maximum number of login attempts] is the number of times the account is locked for a certain period of time due to consecutive failed login attempts, and is set to, for example, 5 times at the time of initial introduction. [User Invalidation Login Failure Count] is the number of times the account is permanently locked due to consecutive login attempt failures, and is 100, for example, at the time of initial introduction. [Login attempt refusal time] is a period in which the account is locked for a certain period of time due to failed login attempts, and is 30 minutes at the time of initial introduction. [Password Validity Period] is a password validity period set when the password is changed, and is 90 days at the time of initial introduction. [Password Expiration Warning Period] is a period in which an account password is about to expire, and is 14 days at the time of initial introduction.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the minimum number of characters of a password to 8 characters, for example, at the time of initial introduction, and sets the number of generations (including the current) to prevent re-use of passwords to 3 generations at the time of initial introduction. The history management center 800AF is registered on the condition that the operator information of the corresponding user is registered in order to register the user information. The business operator information includes attribute information such as the business type and address of each business operator involved in the work of the history management center 800AF.

  The machine history management center 800AF cannot basically cancel the management state (status) of the gaming machine after input, and if an error occurs due to an erroneous operation or the like, a comment is entered in the “total machine history remarks column”. Make it clear so that others can understand. However, since there is a possibility of erroneous insertion, it is possible to cancel only the status entered from the game machine status update screen. When revocation is possible, control is performed by authority so that only a limited number of people can perform revocation. Further, when searching the machine history in order to change the management state (status) of the gaming machine, the machine history management center 800AF searches only for the latest management state (status) of the gaming machine.

The machine history management center 800AF manages the types of data and the retention periods for each type as follows, for example.
(1) Account-related data (for example, business operator information, account information, etc.): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, not physical deletion.
(2) Master information such as gaming machine model (for example, gaming machine model master): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(3) Information that is the basis of machine history management (for example, gaming machine chip shipment information, gaming machine shipment information, etc.): Basically, changes can be made until management is started, but thereafter editing is impossible. , Manage permanently.
(4) Machine history information (for example, history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F): Since it is basically input of fact information, changes after input are not allowed and are managed permanently.
(5) Information notified from the card unit key management center (for example, fraud detection, etc.): Information detected by the system, and is not allowed to be changed and managed permanently.
(6) Input journals to the system (for example, Web input log, online input log, system linkage input file, etc.): 14 days are stored for each type of input and each node.
(7) Output journal from system (for example, Web output log, online output log, system transmission file, etc.): 7 days are kept for each type of output and for each node.
(8) Record of business communication of concentration / distribution (for example, distribution schedule, etc.): Information is retained for about 7 days.
(9) System temporary file (for example, CSV upload file): Deleted after application behavior. However, it is deleted when it is confirmed that the cleaning batch is unnecessary in consideration of abnormal termination.
(10) Model information that has not been updated for a long period of time (for example, model information that has not been updated for a long period of time): Holds two generations.

  In the history management center 800AF, information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the relationship between the management state (status) before the update and the management state (status) after the update becomes abnormal with respect to the abnormality in the management state (status). Can be extracted, or only the information can be output to a file. Therefore, based on the information output in the file, it is possible to notify the user of management status (status) update omission and to update the management status (status) correctly. It should be noted that a user whose management status (status) is not updated may not only be contacted but also interviewed to confirm the correct management status (status) and take a response. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF performs notification such as contacting all of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that are currently in an abnormal management state (status). In addition, the latest information (at the time of file output) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that have become abnormal can be downloaded from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF.

  In the history management center 800AF, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for which the management status (status) has not been updated for a long period of time becomes a management status (status) other than “discard” or “other”. It is possible to extract only the information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, or to output only the information to a file. For abnormalities in which the management state (status) has not been updated for a long time, information at the time of processing is extracted by batch processing and downloaded from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF. In addition, a threshold for the maximum number of files (at the time of initial construction: 100,000 records) is set for one file to be downloaded, and when the threshold is exceeded, output is performed to another file. Furthermore, when downloading a file, the results of processing on the same day are collected and output as a compressed file.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the removal information is input to the history management center 800AF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and used movement information, discard information, trade-in information, and the like are stored in the history management center 800AF. When the information is input, the removal information may be automatically registered in the history management center 800AF. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to manage the history of the gaming machine by assuming that it has been removed from the hall, and to reduce the burden of inputting the removal information from the hall to the history management system.

  (46) In the present embodiment, the configuration is shown in which the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line after the gaming machine manufacturer ships the gaming machine to the hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which shipping information is automatically registered in the machine history management center 800AF when the gaming machine manufacturer inputs information for shipping gaming machines to the hall. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the shipping state history from being forgotten without being registered.

  (47) In the present embodiment, when a gaming machine including the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F constituting the P board 2F is installed in the hall, the enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P machine 2F) shipped by the gaming machine maker, The history management center 800AF stores the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified from the P table 2F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and is notified from the stored information and the P table 2F. Checking with game machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of the collation, for example, an error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. The error notification signal is transmitted, and the abnormality is notified. However, the machine history management center 800AF is not limited to the configuration for notifying the abnormality as a result of the collation, but the P frame 2F or the front frame 5F constituting the P table 2F and the game board 26F determined to be abnormal. It may be configured to prohibit gaming. The machine history management center 800AF may be configured to temporarily allow a game on the P table 2F for a certain period of time even if it is determined to be abnormal, so as not to hinder the hall business activities.

  It should be thought that embodiment disclosed this time is an illustration and restrictive at no points. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  9 effect display device, 1 pachinko machine, 560 game control microcomputer, 100 effect control microcomputer, 18c first hold memory display unit, 18d second hold memory display unit, 18cA, 18dA white mode hold display, 18cB, 18dB color mode hold display, 2F pachinko machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control board, 17F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F rental button, 322F card return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit, 171F payout control unit, 50F, 50SF 7-segment display, 323F CU control unit, 12F glass door open detection switch, 13F Front frame open detection switch.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Multiple types of winning areas,
A signal output means for outputting a signal capable of specifying the number of winnings of the game medium;
Hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of information relating to variable display as hold information;
Hold display means capable of holding display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
A determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the determination by the determination means;
Based on the determination by the determination unit, a specific mode display unit capable of making the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the determination into a specific mode;
As a specific effect related to whether or not the hold display is the specific aspect, a specific effect that can execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect with a higher expectation that the hold display becomes the specific aspect than the first specific effect. Means and
When the first specific effect is executed a plurality of times for one hold display, the one hold display may not change to the specific mode,
When the second specific effect is executed but the hold display is not in the specific mode, the hold display is more targeted than when the first specific effect is executed but the hold display is not in the specific mode. As a result, the rate at which the first specific performance is executed is low,
When the number of the hold information is a predetermined number of 2 or more, when any of the hold display modes is changed, all the hold display modes are changed when the number of the hold information is the predetermined number. A gaming machine in which the ratio of the specific performance is higher than when it is not .

Images